Handleiding Toyota Hilux 2012 (pagina 11 van 644) (Engels)

604270

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/644

Pagina verder

TABLE OF CONTENTS

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,

mirrors, and steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-

terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance and

care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-

yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble

arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat

tire, or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle specifi-

cations

Detailed vehicle information.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this man-

ual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys...................................... 46

1-2. Opening, closing and locking

the doors

Wireless remote control........ 48

Side doors............................. 59

Tailgate ................................. 63

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering

wheel)

Front seats............................ 67

Rear seats ............................ 72

Head restraints ..................... 75

Seat belts.............................. 78

Steering wheel...................... 85

Inside rear view mirror .......... 86

Outside rear view mirrors...... 88

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows

Power windows .................... 91

Quarter windows

(extra-cab models) ............. 94

Back window (vehicles

with sliding type) ................ 95

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .... 96

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system.............................. 102

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture....... 107

SRS airbags....................... 109

Child restraint systems....... 122

Installing child restraints..... 134

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle .............. 146

Engine (ignition) switch....... 162

Automatic transmission....... 166

Manual transmission........... 170

Turn signal lever ................. 173

Parking brake...................... 174

Horn .................................... 175

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ............ 176

Indicators and warning

lights ................................. 180

Multi-information display..... 185

2-3. Operating the lights

and wipers

Headlight switch ................. 191

Fog light switch .................. 195

Windshield wipers

and washer ...................... 199

Headlight cleaner switch .... 201

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control..................... 202

Rear view monitor

system.............................. 207

Four-wheel drive system .... 212

Rear differential lock

system.............................. 217

Driving assist systems........ 221

DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) system ................... 227

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage............. 232

Winter driving tips............... 235

Trailer towing...................... 239

When driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Manual air conditioning

system .............................. 252

Automatic air conditioning

system .............................. 258

Power heater ...................... 265

Rear window defogger

switch................................ 266

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types............. 268

Using the radio.................... 270

Using the CD player............ 275

Playing MP3 and WMA

discs ................................. 282

Operating an iPod............... 290

Operating a USB

memory............................. 300

Optimal use of the audio

system .............................. 309

Using the AUX port ............. 313

Using the steering wheel

audio switches .................. 314

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Touch screen ..................... 317

Setup menu........................ 319

Audio system...................... 327

Using the radio ................... 331

Using the CD player ........... 336

Playing an audio CD

and MP3/WMA discs........ 337

Listening to an iPod............ 350

Listening to a USB

memory ............................ 360

Using the AUX port ............ 369

Listening to Bluetooth

audio ................................ 370

Using the steering wheel

audio switches ................. 384

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ........... 387

Using the Bluetooth

phone ............................... 395

Setting the hands-free

system.............................. 411

Bluetooth

settings ............ 428

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.................. 438

• Personal lights .................. 439

• Interior light....................... 439

3-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features ....... 440

• Glove box ......................... 442

• Console box...................... 443

• Cup holders ...................... 444

• Bottle holders.................... 446

• Auxiliary boxes ................. 447

3-6. Other interior features

Sun visors ........................... 449

Vanity mirror ....................... 450

Clock................................... 451

Ashtray................................ 452

Cigarette lighter .................. 453

Power outlet........................ 454

Seat heaters ....................... 455

Floor mat............................. 457

Compass............................. 459

Deck hooks ......................... 465

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior........... 468

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior............ 472

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements .................... 476

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ...................... 480

Hood................................... 484

Engine compartment .......... 486

Tires ................................... 503

Tire inflation pressure......... 507

Wheels ............................... 509

Air conditioning filter........... 511

Wireless remote control

battery .............................. 513

Checking and replacing

fuses ................................ 516

Light bulbs.......................... 532

Maintenance and care

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ............ 548

If your vehicle needs

to be towed ....................... 549

If you think something is

wrong................................ 555

Fuel pump shut off

system .............................. 556

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns

on or a warning

buzzer sounds .................. 557

If you have a flat tire ........... 565

If the engine will not start.... 584

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ................... 585

If you lose your keys........... 586

If the vehicle battery is

discharged ........................ 587

If your vehicle overheats..... 592

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls................ 595

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................. 596

If your vehicle has

to be stopped in

an emergency................... 598

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 602

Fuel information ................. 623

6-2. Initialization

Items to initialize................. 625

Abbreviation list ............... 628

Alphabetical index ........... 629

What to do if... ................. 639

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

Index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Single-cab models

Windshield wipers

P. 199

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 88

Hood

P. 484

Front turn signal lights

P. 173

Front position lights

P. 191

Headlights

P. 191

Side turn signal lights

P. 173

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

: If equipped

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

P. 503

P. 565

P. 507

Fuel filler door

P. 96

Rear fog lights

P. 195

Rear turn signal lights

P. 173

License plate lights

P. 191

Side doors

P. 59

Back window

P. 95

Rear step bumper

P. 65

Stop/tail lights

P. 191

Tailgate

P. 63

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Extra-cab models

Outside rear view mirrors

Side turn signal lights



P. 88

P. 173

Front fog lights

P. 195

Side turn signal lights

P. 173

Windshield wipers

P. 199

Hood

P. 484

Front turn signal lights

P. 173

Front position lights

P. 191

Headlights

P. 191

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel filler door

P. 96

Back window

Rear window defogger



P. 95

P. 266

: If equipped

Stop/tail lights

P. 191

Tailgate

P. 63

Side doors

P. 59

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

P. 503

P. 565

P. 507

Rear fog lights

P. 195

Rear turn signal lights

P. 173

License plate lights

P. 191

Rear step bumper

P. 65

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Double-cab models

Front fog lights

P. 195

Front turn signal lights

P. 173

Front position lights

P. 191

Outside rear view mirrors

Side turn signal lights



P. 88

P. 173

Side turn signal lights

P. 173

Windshield wipers

P. 199

Hood

P. 484

Headlights

P. 191

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel filler door

P. 96

Back window

Rear window defogger



P. 95

P. 266

Stop/tail lights

P. 191

Tailgate

P. 63

Side doors

P. 59

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

P. 503

P. 565

P. 507

Rear fog lights

P. 195

Rear turn signal lights

P. 173

License plate lights

P. 191

: If equipped

Rear step bumper

P. 65

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Cup holder

P. 444

Floor mat

P. 457

Bottle holder

P. 446

SRS front passenger airbag

P. 109

SRS side airbags

P. 109

Rear seats

P. 72

Cup holders

P. 444

Console box

P. 443

Front seats

P. 67

Power window switch

P. 91

Seat belts

P. 78

Head restraints

P. 75

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors



P. 449

P. 450

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 109

Personal lights

Auxiliary box

P. 439

P. 447

Interior light

P. 439

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Power window switches

P. 91

Bottle holder

P. 446

Window lock switch

P. 92

Door lock switch

P. 60

Inside lock button

P. 60

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Shift lever

P. 166

Shift lock override button

P. 585

Auxiliary box

P. 447

Parking brake lever

P. 174

Cup holder

P. 444

Front drive control lever

P. 212

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Vehicles with manual transmission

Auxiliary box

P. 447

Parking brake lever

P. 174

Shift lever

P. 170

Front drive control lever

P. 212

Cup holder

P. 444

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Cup holder

P. 444

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch



P. 191

P. 173

P. 195

Gauge and meters

P. 176

Tilt steering lock release lever

P. 85

Glove box

P. 442

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 199

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Vehicles without automatic air conditioning system

Emergency flasher switch

P. 548

Air conditioning system

P. 252

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 561

Multi-information display

Clock

P. 185

P. 451

Audio system

Rear view monitor

system



P. 268, 327

P. 207

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system

Emergency flasher switch

P. 548

Rear window defogger

switch



P. 266

Air conditioning system

P. 258

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 561

Multi-information display

Clock

P. 185

P. 451

: If equipped

Audio system

Rear view monitor

system



P. 327

P. 207

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Power outlet

P. 454

VSC OFF switch

P. 222

DPF system switch

P. 227

Cigarette lighter

P. 453

Ashtray

P. 452

AUX port/USB port

P. 300, 313, 360, 369

Power heater switch

P. 265

Seat heater switches

P. 455

Rear window defogger switch

P. 266

Seat heater switches

P. 455

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

SRS driver airbag

P. 109

“DISP” button

P. 186

Audio remote control switches

P. 314, 384

Horn

P. 175

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 162

Cruise control switch

P. 202

: If equipped

Telephone switch

P. 387

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 88

Rear fog light switch

P. 195

Security indicator

P. 102

Headlight leveling dial

P. 192

Hood lock release lever

P. 484

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 201

Rear differential lock switch

P. 217

Instrument cluster light

control dial

P. 178

Fuel filler door opener

P. 96

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Cup holder

P. 444

Floor mat

P. 457

Bottle holder

P. 446

SRS front passenger airbag

P. 109

SRS side airbags

P. 109

Rear seats

P. 72

Cup holders

P. 444

Console box

P. 443

Front seats

P. 67

Power window switch

P. 91

Seat belts

P. 78

Head restraints

P. 75

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors



P. 449

P. 450

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 109

Personal lights

Auxiliary box

P. 439

P. 447

Interior light

P. 439

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Power window switches

P. 91

Bottle holder

P. 446

Window lock switch

P. 92

Door lock switch

P. 60

Inside lock button

P. 60

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Shift lever

P. 166

Shift lock override button

P. 585

Auxiliary box

P. 447

Parking brake lever

P. 174

Cup holder

P. 444

Front drive control lever

P. 212

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with manual transmission

Auxiliary box

P. 447

Parking brake lever

P. 174

Shift lever

P. 170

Front drive control lever

P. 212

Cup holder

P. 444

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Cup holder

P. 444

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch



P. 191

P. 173

P. 195

Gauge and meters

P. 176

Tilt steering lock release lever

P. 85

Glove box

P. 442

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 199

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles without automatic air conditioning system

Emergency flasher switch

P. 548

Air conditioning system

P. 252

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 561

Multi-information display

Clock

P. 185

P. 451

: If equipped

Audio system

Rear view monitor

system



P. 327

P. 207

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Air conditioning system

P. 258

Rear window defogger

switch



P. 266

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 561

Multi-information display

Clock

P. 185

P. 451

Emergency flasher switch

P. 548

Audio system

Rear view monitor

system



P. 327

P. 207

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Power outlet

P. 454

VSC OFF switch

P. 222

Cigarette lighter

P. 453

Ashtray

P. 452

Power heater switch

P. 265

Rear window defogger

switch



P. 266

: If equipped

DPF system switch

P. 227

AUX port/USB port

P. 300, 313, 360, 369

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

SRS driver airbag

P. 109

“DISP” button

P. 186

Horn

P. 175

Cruise control switch

P. 202

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 162

Audio remote control switches

P. 314, 384

Telephone switch

P. 387

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 88

Rear fog light switch

P. 195

Security indicator

P. 102

Headlight leveling dial

P. 192

Hood lock release lever

P. 484

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 201

Rear differential lock switch

P. 217

Instrument cluster light

control dial

P. 178

Fuel filler door opener

P. 96

: If equipped

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-

ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not

installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

Both genuine Toyota and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories

for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be deter-

mined that any of the genuine Toyota parts or accessories supplied with the

vehicle need to be replaced, Toyota recommends that genuine Toyota parts

or accessories, be used to replace them. Other parts or accessories of

matching quality can also be used. Toyota cannot accept any liability or guar-

antee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products,

nor for replacement or installation involving such parts. In addition, damage

or performance problems resulting from the use of non-genuine Toyota spare

parts or accessories may not be covered under warranty.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installation of an RF-transmitter system

The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-

tronic systems such as:

 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

 Cruise control system

 Anti-lock brake system

 SRS airbag system

 Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-

cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-

tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is

available on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record

certain data, such as:

• Engine speed

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Shift position (except manual transmission)

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options

with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record con-

versations, sounds or pictures.

 Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-

tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if

the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-

ment agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or

vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain

explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be

sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner

removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, before you scrap your vehicle.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-

ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-

cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and

reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in

death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them

into the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive

2006/66/EC).

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to

have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with

the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-

tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be

fatal to children.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Checking your vehicle’s model

Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.

Driving system

2: 4WD models

3: Pre Runner

Basic code

6: Models with 1KD-FTV engine

5: Models with 2KD-FTV engine

Cab type and Producing country

T: Single-cab made in South Africa

B: Single-cab made in Thailand

C: Extra-cab made in Thailand

P: Double-cab made in South Africa

D: Double-cab made in Thailand

Transmission type

A: Automatic transmission

M: Manual transmission

Grade

D: DLX

S: SR

Destination

W: Models for European countries

H: Models only for Finland

The model code appears on the manufacturer’s label with the head-

ing “MODEL”.

K U N 2 6 – P A D W

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

The label or plate is placed as shown in the following illustrations.

Type A

Type B

Type C

The manufacturer’s label is located on

the left pillar.

The manufacturer’s label is located on

the left pillar.

The manufacturer’s plate is located

beside the engine compartment.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or

serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do

in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to

the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must

not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its

equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,

“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turn-

ing, etc.) used to operate switches

and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an opera-

tion (e.g. a lid opens).

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys.................................... 46

1-2. Opening, closing and locking

the doors

Wireless remote control...... 48

Side doors .......................... 59

Tailgate............................... 63

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering

wheel)

Front seats.......................... 67

Rear seats .......................... 72

Head restraints ................... 75

Seat belts............................ 78

Steering wheel.................... 85

Inside rear view mirror ........ 86

Outside rear view

mirrors .............................. 88

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows

Power windows................... 91

Quarter windows

(extra-cab models)............ 94

Back window (vehicles

with sliding type)............... 95

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap.................................... 96

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system ............................ 102

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ..... 107

SRS airbags...................... 109

Child restraint systems ..... 122

Installing child restraints ... 134

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Type A

Master keys

Valet key

Key number plate

Type B

Master keys (with wireless

remote control function)

Operating the wireless remote

control function (P. 48)

Valet key

Key number plate

1-1. Key information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 442)

Carry the master key for your own use and provide the attendant with the

valet key.

 Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the

event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, using

the key number plate. (P. 586)

 When riding in an aircraft (type B)

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,

make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft

cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons

are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the

key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

NOTICE

 To prevent key damage

Observe the following:

 Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-

tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

 Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-

rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

 Do not disassemble the keys.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control



: If equipped

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-

cle.

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/

unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

 Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

 Conditions affecting operation

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-

ing situations:

 Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-

ity that generates strong radio waves

 When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-

nication devices

 When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity

 When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic

object

 When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

 When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as

a personal computer

 Key battery depletion

If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be

depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 513)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Certification for wireless remote control

Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this B41TA is in compliance

with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this B42TA is in compliance

with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this B25RA is in compliance

with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote

control, key or door lock switch.

 Wireless remote control (if equipped)

P. 48

 Key

Turning the key operates the doors as follows:

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Door lock switch (if equipped)

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

 Inside lock buttons

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The driver’s door can be

opened by pulling the inside

handle even if the lock button

is in the lock position.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door while pulling the door handle.

Rear door child-protector lock (double-cab models only)

The door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the lock

is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent

children from opening the rear

doors. Push down on each rear

door switch to lock both rear

doors.

STEP

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,

resulting in death or serious injury.

 Always use a seat belt.

 Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

 Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The door may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle

and it may result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the driver’s door, as the door may be opened

even if the inside lock button is in locked position.

 Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear

seats.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Tailgate



: If equipped

The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following

procedures.

 Locking and unlocking the tailgate

Key (vehicles with key hole)

Locks the tailgate

Unlocks the tailgate

 Opening the tailgate

Type A

Unlock the latches and open

the tailgate slowly.

The support cables will hold

the tailgate horizontal.

After closing the tailgate, try

pulling it toward you to make

sure it is securely locked.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Lowering the tailgate

Release the brackets on the sup-

port cables from the lugs on both

sides as shown in the illustration.

Type B

Pull the handle and open the

tailgate slowly.

The support cables will hold

the tailgate horizontal.

After closing the tailgate, try

pulling it toward you to make

sure it is securely locked.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear step bumper (if equipped)

Type A

The rear step bumper is for rear

end protection and easier step-

up loading.

Type B

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Do not drive with the tailgate open.

 Do not get on the rear step bumper.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 After closing the tailgate

Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.

 To prevent damage to the rear step bumper

Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat (separated type)

Seat position adjustment

lever

Vertical height adjustment

dial (driver’s side only) (if

equipped)

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Manual seat (bench type)

Seat position adjustment

lever (driver’s side only)

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Power seat (driver’s side only)

Seat position adjustment

switch

Vertical height adjustment

switch

Seatback angle adjustment

switch

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Moving a front passenger’s seat for rear seat access (extra-cab

models only)

 Getting in the vehicle

Pull the seatback angle adjust-

ment lever and fold down the

seatback. The seat will slide for-

ward.

Move the seat to the front-most

position

 Getting out of the vehicle

Depress the release pedal and

fold down the seatback. The seat

will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most

position

Make sure that no passenger is

seated on the front passenger

seat before depressing the

release pedal.

 After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle

Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Seat adjustment

 To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not

recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply

restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the

shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of

an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-

edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

 Manual seat: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in

position.

 Caution while driving

Extra-cab models only: Do not rest your foot on the release pedal behind the

passenger seat.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear seats



: If equipped

Extra-cab models

 Removing the rear seat cushions (if equipped)

Unhook the lock release

lever.

Pull the seat cushions up

and then pull toward the

front of vehicle.

The seat cushions can be

removed separately.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Double-cab models

 Raising the bottom cushion

Remove the center head

restraint.

Pull the strap and raise the

bottom cushion.

The latch under the bottom

cushion will release allowing

the bottom cushion to be

raised.

Anchor the strap to the

bracket behind the rear seat.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When removing the rear seat cushions (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

 Do not remove the rear seat cushions while driving.

 Be careful not to hit the removed rear seat cushions against a person or

drop it on yourself.

 When reinstalling, returning the rear seat cushions, bottom cushion to

their original position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

 Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

 Make sure there are no obstacles under the seat which would prevent the

seat from properly locking into place.

 Make sure the rear seat cushions, bottom cushion securely locked by

pushing it upward and downward.

 Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

Replace the center head

restraint.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Head restraints

Front seats

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pressing the lock release

button.

Rear seats (double-cab models only)

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pressing the lock release

button.

Lock release button

Lock release buttons

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Removing the head restraints

 Installing the head restraints

 Adjusting the height of the head restraints

 Adjusting the rear seat head restraint (double-cab models only)

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when

using.

Pull the head restraint up while pressing

the lock release button.

Align the head restraint with the installa-

tion holes and push it down to the lock

position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

 Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

 After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position.

 Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

 Correct use of the seat belts

3-point type

 Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not

come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoul-

der.

 Position the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

 Adjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

 Do not twist the seat belt

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-point type (if equipped)

 Position the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

 Adjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

 Do not twist the seat belt.

 Fastening and releasing the seat belt

To fasten the seat belt, push

the plate into the buckle

until a click sound is heard.

To release the seat belt,

press the release button.

Release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

(if equipped)

Push the seat belt shoulder

anchor down while pressing

the release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder

anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up

and down as needed until you

hear a click.

 Adjusting the length of the belt (2-point type seat belt) (if

equipped)

Lengthen

Shorten

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat

belt to quickly restrain the occu-

pant by retracting the seat belt

when the vehicle is subjected to

certain types of severe frontal

collision or side collision (vehi-

cles with SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags).

The pretensioner may not acti-

vate in the event of a minor frontal

or side impact, or a rear impact.

 Emergency locking retractor (ELR) (3-point type seat belt)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend so that you can move around fully.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Pregnant women

 People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 78)

 Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult

size.

 Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 122)

 When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 78 regarding seat belt usage.

 Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate

for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-

sions.

 Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, for seat belt replacement or installation.

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (P. 78)

Women who are pregnant should position

the lap belt as low as possible over the

hips in the same manner as other occu-

pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and position the

belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact

over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only the pregnant woman, but also the

fetus could suffer death or serious injury

as a result of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Wearing a seat belt

 Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

 Always wear a seat belt properly.

 Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children.

 Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always

use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

 To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than

necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting

up straight and well back in the seats.

 Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

 Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

 When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

 Seat belt pretensioners

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that

case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Seat belt damage and wear

 Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

 Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat

belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

 Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

 Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

 Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from

operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Steering wheel

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

 After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an

accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and

push the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel.

After adjustment, pull the lever

up to secure the steering

wheel.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Inside rear view mirror

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view

mirror by moving it up and down.

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by

using the following functions:

Normal position

Anti-glare position

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted.

Manual adjustable type

Adjust a mirror.

Power adjustable type

To select a mirror to adjust,

press the switch.

Left

Right

To adjust the mirror, press the

switch.

Right

Down

Left

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Folding the mirrors

Manual folding type

Push the mirror back in the direc-

tion of the vehicle’s rear.

Auto folding type

Press the switch to fold the mir-

rors.

Press it again to extend them to

the original position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Mirror angle can be adjusted when (power adjustable type)

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

 When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 266)

CAUTION

 When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an

accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

 Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

 Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

 Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

 When a mirror is moving (power adjustable type)

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your

hand caught by the moving mirror.

 When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

NOTICE

 If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to

free the mirror.

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows



: If equipped

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Type A

Closing

Opening

One-touch opening*

(driver’s window only)

*: Pushing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

Type B

Closing

Opening

One-touch opening

(driver’s window only)

One-touch closing

(driver’s window only)

*: Pushing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Window lock switch

Press the switch down to lock

the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent chil-

dren from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

 The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 Jam protection function (type B)

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,

window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

 If the battery is disconnected (driver’s window only) (type B)

The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.

Open the window halfway.

Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue hold-

ing the switch for 1 second.

The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on

when initial settings are complete.

STEP

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

 Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in

some instances, even death.

 Jam protection function (type B)

 Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection

function.

 The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Quarter windows (extra-cab models)

 Closing the quarter windows

Make sure that the quarter windows are securely closed after closing them.

CAUTION

 Opening or closing the quarter windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

 Do not allow children to operate the quarter windows.

Closing a quarter window on someone can cause serious injury, and in

some instances, even death.

The quarter windows can be opened and closed using the latch han-

dle.

To open the quarter windows,

pull the latch handle toward

you and swing it fully out.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Back window (vehicles with sliding type)

 Closing the back window

Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.

CAUTION

 Opening or closing the back window

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when the window is being operated.

 Do not allow children to operate the back window.

Closing the back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in

some instances, even death.

The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release

lever.

To open the back window,

push the lock release lever

and slide the back window.

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

 Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-

dows are closed.

 Opening the fuel tank cap

Type A

Pull up the opener to open the

fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the

back of the fuel filler door.

STEP

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Type B

To unlock the fuel tank cap,

insert the key and turn it coun-

terclockwise.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

STEP

1-5. Refueling

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Closing the fuel tank cap

Type A

After refueling, turn the fuel tank

cap until you hear a click. Once

the cap is released, it will turn

slightly in the opposite direction.

Type B

Close the fuel tank cap

Make sure to put the fuel tank cap

with the arrow upward and turn it

slowly to close.

Lock the fuel cap

Turning the fuel cap key clock-

wise.

STEP

Arrow

STEP

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Fuel types

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European standard EN590

Except EU area (except Russia):

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur and has a cetane number of

48 or higher

Except EU area (Russia):

Diesel fuel, Cetane number 48 or higher

Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to GOST R52368-2005

(Sulfur max 50 ppm).

 Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)

100

1-5. Refueling

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do

so may result in death or serious injury.

 After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an

unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to

discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from

static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

 Type A only: Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to

remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot

weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

 Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their

body to come close to an open fuel tank.

 Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

 Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

 Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

 When refueling

Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with

the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off

function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.

 When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your

vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in

death or serious injury.

101

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control

system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the

vehicle’s painted surface.

102

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

 System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

 Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

 If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

 If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in

the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after

the key has been removed

from the engine switch to indi-

cate that the system is operat-

ing.

The indicator light stops flash-

ing after the registered key

has been inserted into the

engine switch to indicate that

the system has been can-

celed.

103

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Certification for the engine immobilizer system

Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this RI-33BTY is in compliance

with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC.

104

1-6. Theft deterrent system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

105

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

106

1-6. Theft deterrent system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

107

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in

the seat. (P. 6 7 )

Adjust the position of the

seat forward or backward to

ensure the pedals can be

reached and easily

depressed to the extent

required. (P. 67)

Adjust the seatback so that

the controls are easily oper-

able. (P. 67)

Adjust the tilt position of the

steering wheel downward

so the airbag is facing your

chest. (P. 85 )

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (P. 75)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(P. 78)

108

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

 Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

 Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

 Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may

also be damaged.

 Adjusting the seat position

 Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving seat.

 Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

109

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain

types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the

occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the

risk of death or serious injury.

SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-

senger from impact with interior components

110

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

SRS airbag system components

Front airbag sensors

Front passenger airbag

Side and curtain shield airbag

sensors (if equipped)

Seat belt pretensioners and

force limiters

Curtain shield airbag sensors

(if equipped)

Side airbags (if equipped)

Curtain shield airbags

(if equipped)

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

Airbag sensor assembly

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS side airbags (if equipped)

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS curtain shield airbags (if equipped)

Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer

seats

111

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As

the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the

airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-

pants.

Bench type front seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the

driver and front outside passenger, and they are not designed to pro-

tect an occupant in the front center seating position.

112

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

 Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

 A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

 Vehicles without SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module

(steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats may

be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

 Vehicles with SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module

(steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts

of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several

minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

 The windshield may crack.

 SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

 The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds

the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-

mately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that

does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle

strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move

or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision

(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes

under, the bed of a truck etc.).

 Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt

pretensioners will activate.

 SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags)

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of

an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force correspond-

ing to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3300 lb.]

vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the

vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph]).

113

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other

than a collision (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

 Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-

bags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-

cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-

bags may occur.

 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or

hard surface

 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

 Landing hard or falling

 Collision from the side

 Collision from the rear

 Vehicle rollover

114

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a colli-

sion to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed

to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over,

or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

 Collision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger com-

partment

 Collision from the side at an angle

 Collision from the front

 Collision from the rear

 Vehicle rollover

115

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional

In the following cases, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.

 Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

 The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

 A portion of a door is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved

in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side airbags

and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

116

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 The pad section of the steering wheel

or dashboard near the front passenger

airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

 The surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

 The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-

lars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-

ding) containing the curtain shield

airbags inside is scratched, cracked,

or otherwise damaged.

117

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

 The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.)

of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-

vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several

ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm

(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply

by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your

seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-

slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-

ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-

ment panel controls.

118

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-

bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

 Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small

to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-

tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in

the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are

safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 122)

119

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

 Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

 Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

 Vehicles with SRS side and curtain

shield airbags: Do not lean against the

door, the roof side rail or the front, side

and rear pillars.

 Vehicles with SRS side and curtain

shield airbags: Do not allow anyone to

kneel on the passenger seat toward the

door or put their head or hands outside

the vehicle.

120

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not hang coat hang-

ers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could

become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS

curtain shield airbags deploy.

 Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not use seat acces-

sories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they

may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may pre-

vent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause

the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

 Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board or steering wheel pad.

These items can become projectiles

when the SRS driver and front passen-

ger airbags deploy.

 Vehicles with SRS side and curtain

shield airbags: Do not attach anything

to areas such as a door, windshield

glass, side door glass, front or rear pil-

lar, roof side rail and assist grip.

121

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-

bag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

 Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

 If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do

so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

 If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel

pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have

them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

 Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications

without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional. The SRS airbags may malfunction or

deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

 Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

 Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rails

 Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment

 Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kan-

garoo bar etc.)

 Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

 Installation of electronic devices such as RF-transmitter and CD players

122

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is

much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

 Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is

appropriate to the age and size of the child.

 For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the

child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(P. 134)

 If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you

reside, please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for the child

restraint system installation.

 Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which

conforms to the regulation ECE No.44.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.

123

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups

according to the regulation ECE No.44:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)

Group 0

: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)

Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)

Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)

Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)

In this owner’s manual, the following 3 types of popular child restraint

systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained:

124

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Baby seat

Equal to Group 0 and 0

of ECE

No.44

Child seat

Equal to Group 0

and I of ECE

No.44

Junior seat

Equal to Group II and III of ECE

No.44

125

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Single-cab models

Front passenger seat

Separate seat

Bench seat

Outside

Center

With

airbag

Without

airbag

With

airbag

Without

airbag

Up to 10 kg

(22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

Never

put

Never

put

L1 X

Up to 13 kg

(28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

Never

put

Never

put

L1 X

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months -

4 years)

Rear-

facing

— X

Never put

Rear-

facing

— X

Rear-

facing

— X

Never put

Rear-

facing

— X

Forward-facing —

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

L3 X

Mass groups

Seating

position

126

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group.

L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO

(9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-

able outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-

tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must

be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer

concerned and the seller of those seats.

127

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Extra-cab models

Front passenger seat

Rear seat

With

airbag

Without

airbag

Up to 10 kg

(22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

Never put

L1 X

Up to 13 kg

(28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

Never put

L1 X

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months -

4 years)

Rear-facing

— X

Never put

Rear-facing

— X

Forward-facing —

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

L3 X

Mass

groups

Seating

position

128

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group.

L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO

(9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-

able outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-

tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must

be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer

concerned and the seller of those seats.

129

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Double-cab models

Front passenger

seat

Rear seat

With

airbag

Without

airbag

Outside Center

Up to 10 kg

(22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

Never put

L1 U X

Up to 13 kg

(28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

Never put

L1 U X

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months -

4 years)

Rear-

facing — X

Never put

Rear-

facing — X

UUF

Forward-facing —

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

L3 U UF

Mass

groups

Seating

position

130

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved

for the use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint

system approved for the use in this mass group.

L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group.

L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO

(9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-

able outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-

tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must

be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer

concerned and the seller of those seats.

131

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat

 Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

 Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

 If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear

seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 78)

When you have to use a child restraint

system on the front passenger seat,

adjust the following:

 The seatback to the most upright

position

 The seat cushion to the fully rear-

ward position (if equipped)

132

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Using a child restraint system

The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-

erly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the

event of sudden braking or an accident).

 Child restraint precautions

 For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system

depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is

not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

 Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-

dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat

than in the front seat.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger

seat.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-

ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

 A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-

senger seat only when it is unavoidable. Adjust the seatback as upright as

possible and always move the seat as far back as possible because the

front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

133

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Child restraint precautions

 Vehicles with SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags: Do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door

or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which

the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child

is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death

or serious injury to the child.

 Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by

the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If

it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child

in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

 When the child restraint system is not in use

 Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-

senger compartment.

 If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sud-

den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

134

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the seats using a seat belt.

2-point type seat belt (if

equipped)

3-point type seat belts (An

ELR belt requires a locking

clip)

135

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (2-point type seat belt)

(if equipped)

 Forward-facing  Child seat

Place the child restraint system

on the rear seat facing the front

of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

While pushing the child restraint

system down into the seat, allow

the belt to tighten by pulling its

free end until the child restraint

system is securely in place.

STEP

136

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (3-point type seat belt)

 Rear-facing  Baby seat/child seat

Place the child restraint system

on the rear seat facing the rear

of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

Install a locking clip near the

plate of the lap and shoulder belt

by inserting the lap and shoulder

webbing through the recesses of

the locking clip.

STEP

137

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Forward-facing Child seat

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

Install a locking clip near the

plate of the lap and shoulder belt

by inserting the lap and shoulder

webbing through the recesses of

the locking clip.

STEP

138

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Junior seat

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint

system. Fit the seat belt to the

child restraint system according

to the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the belt is

not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is

correctly positioned over the

child’s shoulder and that the lap

belt is as low as possible.

(P. 78)

STEP

139

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

2-point type seat belt (if

equipped): Push the buckle

release button.

3-point type seat belt: Push the

buckle release button and fully

retract the seat belt.

 When installing a child restraint system in the seat with ELR belt

You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the

instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child

restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the fol-

lowing item from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

Locking clip for child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

140

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual

and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other

passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Double-cab models: If the driver’s seat

interferes with the child restraint system

and prevents it from being attached cor-

rectly, attach the child restraint system

to the right-hand rear seat (left-hand

drive vehicles) or the left-hand rear seat

(right-hand drive vehicles).

 Double-cab models: Adjust the front

passenger seat so that it does not inter-

fere with the child restraint system.

141

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

 Only put a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front seat when unavoid-

able. When installing a forward-facing

child restraint on the front passenger

seat, move the seat as far back as pos-

sible (if equipped).

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

 Never use a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat.

The force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause death

or serious injury to children in the event

of an accident.

142

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

 Vehicles with front bench seat: Do not

install a child restraint system in the

center position. This seat position is not

designed to hold a child restraint sys-

tem.

If used in the center position, depend-

ing on its type, the child restraint sys-

tem may interfere with the proper

usage of the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s seat belts. It may also hamper

your driving.

 Extra-cab models: Do not install a child

restraint system on the rear seat.

These seats are not designed to hold a

child restraint system.

 Double-cab models: Do not install a

rear-facing child (convertible) seat in

the rear center position. This seat posi-

tion is not designed to hold a rear-fac-

ing child (convertible) seat. Otherwise,

the child or front seat occupant(s) may

be killed or seriously injured in the

event of sudden braking, sudden

swerving or an accident.

143

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

 If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,

please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-

tion.

 When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s

shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event

of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

 Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be

sure it is secure.

 After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

 Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

144

1-7. Safety information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

When driving

145

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle ............ 146

Engine (ignition) switch..... 162

Automatic transmission .... 166

Manual transmission......... 170

Turn signal lever ............... 173

Parking brake ................... 174

Horn.................................. 175

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters .......... 176

Indicators and warning

lights ............................... 180

Multi-information

display ............................ 185

2-3. Operating the lights

and wipers

Headlight switch................ 191

Fog light switch................. 195

Windshield wipers

and washer..................... 199

Headlight cleaner switch... 201

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control.................... 202

Rear view monitor

system ............................ 207

Four-wheel drive system... 212

Rear differential lock

system ............................ 217

Driving assist systems ...... 221

DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) system.................. 227

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage ........... 232

Winter driving tips ............. 235

Trailer towing .................... 239

146

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-

ing:

 Starting the engine

P. 162

 Driving

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(P. 166)

Release the parking brake. (P. 174)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.

(P. 170)

Release the parking brake. (P. 174)

Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently

depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

STEP

147

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Stopping

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to P or N. (P. 166)

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to N. (P. 170)

 Parking the vehicle

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 174)

Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 166)

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your

person.

STEP

148

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Starting off on a steep uphill

Automatic transmission

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever

to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Manual transmission

With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully

depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.

Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as

gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 174)

Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 170)

If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the

wheels as needed.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your

person.

STEP

149

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Driving in the rain

 Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

 Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery.

 Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road

surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

 Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec-

ommended:

 For the first 300 km (200 miles):

Avoid sudden stops.

 For the first 800 km (500 miles):

Do not tow a trailer.

 For the first 1000 km (600 miles):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.

150

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Idling time before stopping the engine

To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately

after high-speed driving or driving up a hill.

 Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability

of the correct fuel. (P. 609)

Driving condition Idling time

Normal city driving Not necessary

High-speed

driving

Constant speed of approx.

80 km/h (50 mph)

Approximately

20 seconds

Constant speed of approx.

100 km/h (62 mph)

Approximately

1 minute

Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100

km/h (62 mph) or more (race track driving etc.)

Approximately

2 minutes

151

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When starting the vehicle

On vehicles with automatic transmission, always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from

creeping.

 When driving the vehicle

 Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident

that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-

culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the

vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-

ator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake

pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-

ing in an accident.

 Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot

parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

152

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll back-

wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the

shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

 If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and

check that the back window (vehicles with sliding type) is closed. Large

amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an

accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional immediately.

 On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P

while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

 Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

 Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with automatic transmission) or 1

(vehicles with manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage to the transmission and may result in a loss of vehi-

cle control.

 Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the

engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is

selected.

153

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the

power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to

steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 598

 Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (P. 167)

 Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or

outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,

resulting in death or serious injury.

 Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body

are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

 On vehicles with manual transmission, do not operate the clutch halfway

for a long period of time unless it is necessary. Doing so could not only

speed up clutch wear, but could also damage the clutch or even cause a

fatal accident such as vehicle fire.

154

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When driving on slippery road surfaces

 Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

 Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-

shifting and down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an

accident.

 After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent

the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet

and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in

an accident.

 When shifting the shift lever

On vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift lever

with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other

than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that

may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

 If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as

possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads

and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

155

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When the vehicle is stopped

 Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with automatic transmis-

sion only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,

causing an accident.

 Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space

and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

 On vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due

to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while

the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

 If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

 Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When the vehicle is parked

 Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-

cle’s electrical components.

 Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a

place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when

luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

 Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place

containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-

cle.

 Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a

metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause

the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

 Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with

automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

157

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

 Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it

is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is

running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead

to death or a serious health hazard.

 Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless

and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

 If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

 The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or

crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,

be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle,

resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

 Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted

with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is

running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situa-

tions with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent

exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures

on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all win-

dows and thoroughly ventilate the area.

158

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever

or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to

engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-

lated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to

death or a serious health hazard.

 When braking

 When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause

one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the

parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

 If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this

case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed

more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

 Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted

brakes.

 The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the

systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will

increase.

If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes

fixed immediately.

159

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When driving the vehicle

 Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

 On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not use the accelerator pedal

or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the

vehicle on a hill.

 On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift gears unless the clutch

pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal

abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

 On vehicles with manual transmission, observe the following to prevent

the clutch from being damaged.

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble.

• Do not use any gears other than the 1st gear when starting off and

moving forward.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

• Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill

grade.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

 On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R

when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-

mission and gears.

 On vehicles with manual transmission, if you cannot accelerate the vehicle

even when the clutch is engaged and the accelerator pedal is depressed,

this may mean that the clutch is slipping, and the vehicle may be rendered

undriveable. Have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional inspect the vehicle as soon as

possible.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When parking the vehicle

On vehicles with automatic transmission, always shift the shift lever to P.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

 Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

 Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for

an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

 When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

 Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-speed driving or hill

climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger has cooled down.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.

 If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

 It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

 The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

 The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 565)

161

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may

cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

 Engine stalling

 Short in electrical components

 Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be

sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional check the following:

 Brake function

 Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, transfer (4WD models), differential, etc.

 Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

162

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Engine (ignition) switch

 Starting the engine

Automatic transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

The indicator turns on.

After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine

switch to the “START” position to start the engine.

Manual transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in N.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

The indicator turns on.

After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine

switch to the “START” position to start the engine.

STEP

163

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Changing the engine switch positions

“LOCK”

The steering wheel is locked

and the key can be removed.

(Vehicles with automatic trans-

mission: The key can be

removed only when the shift

lever is in P.)

“ACC”

Some electrical components

such as the audio system can

be used.

“ON”

All electrical components can

be used.

“START”

For starting the engine.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”

Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual

transmission). (P. 166, 170)

 If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 102)

 When the steering lock cannot be released

 Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in

the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.

STEP

Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”

position.

STEP

When starting the engine, the engine

switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”

position. To free it, turn the key while turn-

ing the steering wheel slightly left and

right.

165

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the

accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

 Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving.

If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,

turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An acci-

dent may result if the engine is stopped while driving.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods

of time without the engine running.

 When starting the engine

 Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may

overheat the starter and wiring system.

 Do not race a cold engine.

 If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine

checked immediately.

166

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Automatic transmission



: If equipped

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

 Shifting the shift lever

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the

shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the

vehicle is completely stopped.

167

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Shift position purpose

*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D

position for normal driving.

Shift position Function

P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

R Reversing

N Neutral

D Normal driving*

4 Position for engine braking

3 Position for more powerful engine braking

2 Position for more powerful engine braking

L Position for maximum engine braking

168

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Downshift restriction

The maximum allowable speeds are as follows.

*: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model

your vehicle is. (P. 41)

 AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver perfor-

mance and driving conditions.

AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.

The engine speed may remain high after releasing the accelerator pedal.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

 When driving with the cruise control system (If equipped)

Engine braking will not occur when downshifting from D to 4. (P. 202)

 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 585

Downshifting

Maximum speed

km/h (mph)

SR grade* DLX grade*

Front drive

control lever

in H2 or H4

Front drive

control lever

in L4

Front drive

control lever

in H2 or H4

Front drive

control lever

in L4

D  4 140 (87) - 145 (90) -

4  3 100 (62) 35 (22) 105 (65) 40 (25)

3  2 65 (40) 25 (16) 70 (43) 25 (16)

2  L 20 (12) 5 (3) 20 (12) 5 (3)

169

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,

resulting in an accident.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Manual transmission



: If equipped

 Shifting the shift lever

Fully depress the clutch pedal

before operating the shift

lever, and then release it

slowly.

If it is difficult to shift in reverse,

shift the shift lever to N,

release the clutch pedal

momentarily, and then try

again.

171

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Maximum downshifting speeds

Observe the downshifting speeds in the following table to prevent over-rev-

ving the engine.

4WD models

: With 265/65R17 tires

: With 255/70R15C tires

: With 205R16C tires

Shift

position

Front drive

control

lever

Maximum speed

km/h (mph)

1KD-FTV

engine

2KD-FTV engine

For Russia and

Ukraine

Except for

Russia and

Ukraine

H2, H4

39 (24)

38 (24)*

36 (22)*

35 (22)*

2, 3

38 (24)*

37 (23)*

2, 3

L4 15 (9) 14 (9)

15 (9)

14 (9)*

2, 3

H2, H4

73 (45)

71 (44)*

67 (42)*

65 (40)*

2, 3

70 (43)*

68 (42)*

2, 3

29 (18)

28 (17)*

26 (16)*

25 (16)*

2, 3

27 (17)*

1, 2

26 (16)*

H2, H4

119 (74)

115 (71)*

109 (68)*

105 (65)*

2, 3

114 (71)*

110 (68)*

2, 3

46 (29)

45 (28)*

42 (26)*

41 (25)*

2, 3

45 (28)*

43 (27)*

2, 3

H2, H4

170 (106)

165 (103)*

156 (97)*

151 (94)*

2, 3

164 (102)*

158 (98)*

2, 3

67 (42)

64 (40)*

61 (38)*

59 (37)*

2, 3

64 (40)*

62 (39)*

2, 3

172

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Pre Runner

Shift position

Maximum speed

km/h (mph)

With 265/65R17 tires

With 255/70R15C and

205R16C tires

1 38 (24) 37 (23)

2 70 (43) 68 (42)

3 114 (71) 110 (68)

4 164 (102) 158 (98)

173

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Turn signal lever

 Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned

out.

The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions

of the driver:

Right turn

Left turn

Lane change to the right

(push and hold the lever

partway)

The right hand signals will

flash until you release the

lever.

Lane change to the left

(push and hold the lever

partway)

The left hand signals will flash

until you release the lever.

174

2-1. Driving procedures

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Parking brake

 Usage in winter time

See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 235)

NOTICE

 Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake

wear.

To set the parking brake,

fully pull the parking brake

lever while depressing the

brake pedal.

At this time, the brake system

warning light will come on.

To release the parking

brake, slightly raise the

lever and lower it in com-

pletely while pressing the

button.

At this time, the brake system

warning light will go off.

175

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Horn

 After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(P. 85)

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

176

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Non-Optitron type meters

Optitron type meters

177

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Odometer/trip meter display change button

P. 178

Odometer and trip meter display

Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the

meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to

record and display different distances independently.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

178

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Changing the display

Switches between odometer and

trip meter displays. When the trip

meter is displayed, pressing and

holding the button will reset the

trip meter.

The units may differ depending

on the target region.

Instrument panel light control (if equipped)

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turn-

ing the knob.

Darker

Brighter

179

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 The meters illuminate when

Vehicles without optitron type meter

The front position lights is turned on.

Vehicles with optitron type meter

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 The odometer and trip meter display illuminate when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 The brightness of the instrument panel lights

When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced

slightly unless the control dial is turned fully clockwise.

 When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The trip meter data will be reset.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the engine and its components

 Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

 The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 592)

180

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Indicators and warning lights

The indicators and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-

ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-

tems.

Instrument cluster (non-optitron type)

Instrument cluster (optitron type)

181

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Center panel (vehicles without multi-information display)

Center panel (vehicles with multi-information display)

182

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(P. 173)

(if equipped)

Slip indicator

(P. 222)

Headlight high beam

indicator (P. 191)

(if equipped)

VSC OFF indicator

(P. 222)

(optitron type

meters)

Tail light indicator

(P. 191)

(

4WD models

)

Four-wheel drive

indicator(P. 212)

(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator

(P. 195)

(if equipped)

Rear differential lock

indicator (P. 217)

Rear fog light indicator

(P. 196)

(automatic

transmission)

Shift position indicators

(P. 166)

Engine preheating

indicator (P. 162)

(if equipped)

Cruise control indicator

(P. 202)

1, 2

183

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the

vehicle’s systems. (P. 557)

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn

off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a

malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do

not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

: The light turns to yellow (except for Russia and Ukraine) or flashes (for

Russia and Ukraine) to indicate a malfunction.

(for driver)

(for front

passenger)

(if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped)

(4WD models)

1, 3

184

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS warning light not

come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are

not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death

or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately

if this occurs.

185

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Multi-information display



: If equipped

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.

 Trip information (P. 187)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related

information.

 Clock (P. 451)

186

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Switch the display

“INFO.” or “DISP” button

Items displayed can be switched

by pressing the “INFO.” button or

“DISP” button.

The units may differ depending

on the target region.

“RESET” button

187

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Display items

 Outside temperature display

 Average fuel consumption

 Current fuel consumption

 Average vehicle speed

Displays the outside temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed is

from -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F).

Displays the average fuel consumption since the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.

• The function can be reset by pressing the

“RESET” button for longer than 1 second when

the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a

reference.

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Displays the average vehicle speed since the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET”

button for longer than 1 second when the average

vehicle speed is displayed.

188

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Elapsed time

 Driving range

 Compass

P. 459

 Display off

A blank screen is displayed.

Displays the elapsed time after the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

• When the engine switch is turned on, time is

counted from 0:00. When the time exceeds

19:59, the counter returns to 0:00.

• The function can be reset by pressing the

“RESET” button for longer than 1 second when

the elapsed time is displayed.

Displays the estimated maximum distance that

can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your aver-

age fuel consumption. As a result, the actual dis-

tance that can be driven may differ from that

displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the

tank, the display may not be updated.

189

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Set up display (if equipped)

 Selecting the units

Unit for only the fuel consump-

tion rate can be interchanged.

Switch to the average fuel consumption or current fuel con-

sumption display.

Hold down the “INFO.” button until the unit flashes.

Push the “RESET” button to change the unit.

Push the “INFO.” button.

STEP

190

2-2. Instrument cluster

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

 When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h

[12 mph])

 When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/

exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

 When “--” is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

 When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The following information data and settings will be reset:

 Average fuel consumption

 Average vehicle speed

 Elapsed time

191

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

The front position, tail,

license plate and

instrument panel lights

turn on.

The headlights and all

lights listed above turn

on.

The headlights and all

the lights listed above

turn on and off auto-

matically (when the

engine switch is in the

“ON” position).

(if equipped)

192

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push

the lever away from you to

turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the

center position to turn the high

beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high

beams once.

You can flash the high beams

with the headlights on or off.

Manual headlight leveling dial

The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number

of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.

Raises the level of the head-

lights

Lowers the level of the head-

lights

193

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Guide to dial settings

Occupancy and luggage

load conditions

Dial position

Left-hand drive vehicles

Right-

hand drive

vehicles

Occupants

Luggage

load

Single-cab

models

Extra-cab

models

Double-cab

models

Driver None 0 0 0 0

Driver

Full

luggage

343.55

 Daytime running light system (if equipped)

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on

automatically whenever the engine is started. The daytime running light sys-

tem is not designed for use at night.

 Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

 Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the key is removed and the driver’s door is opened

while the lights are turned on.

The sensor may not function properly if

an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to

the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light and

may cause the automatic headlight sys-

tem to malfunction.

194

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

195

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fog light switch

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-

tions, such as in rain and fog.

Front fog light switch (if equipped)

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

196

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear fog light switch

Type A

Turns the rear fog light off

Turns the rear fog light on

Type B

Turns the rear fog light on/off

197

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Front and rear fog light switch (if equipped)

Turns the front and rear fog

lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

Turns both front and rear

fog lights on

198

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Fog lights can be used when

Vehicles with front fog lights or rear fog lights only

The headlights or front position lights are turned on.

Vehicles with both front and rear fog lights

Front fog lights: The headlights or front position lights are turned on.

Rear fog lights (vehicles with front and rear fog light switch):

The headlights or front position lights are turned on.

Rear fog lights (vehicles with rear fog light switch [type B]):

The headlights are turned on or both the front position lights and front fog

lights are turned on.

The rear fog lights will turn off if the front position lights and front fog lights

turn off once the headlight switch has been turned to the “AUTO” position.

The rear fog lights will not come on even if the front position lights and front

fog lights turn on again.

199

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Windshield wipers and washer

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper

interval can be also adjusted.

Intermittent windshield

wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper

operation

High speed windshield

wiper operation

Temporary operation

Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

200

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the

windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

 When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

 When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-

heat.

 When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

The wipers will automatically

operate a couple of times after

the washer squirts.

201

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Headlight cleaner switch



: If equipped

 The headlight cleaners can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position and the headlight switch is turned

on.

 Windshield washer linked operation

When the windshield washer is operated with the engine switch in the “ON”

position and the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will operate once.

(P. 199)

NOTICE

 When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the

headlights.

202

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control



: If equipped

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

Indicator

Cruise control switch

 Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON-OFF” button to

activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will

come on.

Press the button again to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,

and push the lever down to set

the speed.

The vehicle speed at the

moment the lever is released

becomes the set speed.

STEP

203

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set

speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily

move the lever in the desired

direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the

lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the

lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-

tinually until the lever is released.

204

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you

cancels the constant speed

control.

The speed setting is also can-

celed when the brakes are

applied or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission only) is

depressed.

Pushing the lever up

resumes the constant

speed control.

Resuming is available when

the vehicle speed is more than

approximately 40 km/h (25

mph).

205

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Cruise control can be set when

 The shift lever is in the D or range 4.

 Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

 Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

 The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set

speed resumes.

 Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be

increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then

pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

 Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following

situations:

 Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)

below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

 Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

 VSC is activated. (if equipped)

 If the cruise control indicator light turns to yellow (except for Russia

and Ukraine) or flashes (for Russia and Ukraine)

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press

the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels

immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise

control system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

206

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

 Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

 In heavy traffic

 On roads with sharp bends

 On winding roads

 On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

 On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

 When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

207

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear view monitor system



: If equipped

The rear view monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of

the area behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed

in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to

the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is dis-

played when the shift lever is

in the R position.

Vehicles with automatic

transmission

Vehicles with manual trans-

mission

If the shift lever is shifted out of

R, the screen returns to the

previous one.

208

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Displayed area

The area covered by the camera is lim-

ited. Objects which that are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may

vary depending on vehicle orientation or

road conditions.

Corners of bumper

209

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Rear view monitor camera

 Smear effect

 The camera uses a special lens. The

distance of the image that appears on

the screen differs from the actual dis-

tance.

 In the following cases, it may be difficult

to see images on the screen even when

the system is functioning correctly:

• The vehicle is in a dark area, such

as at night.

• The temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low.

• Water droplets are on the camera

lens or humidity is high, such as

when it rains.

• Foreign matter, such as snow and

mud, adheres to the camera lens.

• The sun or headlights are shining

directly into the camera lens.

• The camera has scratches or dirt on

it.

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected

off the vehicle body, is picked up by the

camera, a smear effect

* characteristic to

the camera may occur.

*: Smear effectA phenomenon that

occurs when a bright light is picked up

by the camera; when transmitted by

the camera, the light source appears to

have a vertical streak above and below

it.

210

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Flicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, or mercury

lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

CAUTION

 When using the rear view monitor system

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in

death or serious injuries:

 Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

 Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is

clear.

 Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual

distances.

 Do not use the system if the tailgate is open.

211

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

 If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting

angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

 Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the

vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

 If the camera lens is extremely dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image.

Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely

dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

 The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly

distorted when the system is cold.

 When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the

camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunction-

ing.

 Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

 Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to

adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

 As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble

or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

 Do not subject the camera to a strong impact.

212

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Four-wheel drive system



: If equipped

Use the front drive control lever to select the following transfer

modes.

H2 (high speed position, two-wheel drive)

Use this for normal driving on dry hard-surfaced roads. This position

gives greater economy, quietest ride and least wear.

H4 (high speed position, four-wheel drive)

Use this for driving only on tracks that permit the tires slide, like off-

road, icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction

than two-wheel drive.

The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on

213

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

N (neutral position)

No power is delivered to the wheels. The vehicle must be stopped.

The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on

L4 (low speed position, four-wheel drive)

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use “L4” for climbing or

descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud

or deep snow.

The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on

214

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential) (if equipped)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations

described in the following shifting procedures.

Shifting between H2 and H4

Shifting from H2 to H4

Reduce your speed to less than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Move the front drive control lever.

Shifting from H4 to H2

Simply move the front drive control lever.

In both cases, you need not depress the clutch pedal. (manual transmission)

Shifting between H4 and L4 (automatic transmission)

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Move the front drive control lever.

STEP

215

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Shifting between H4 and L4 (manual transmission)

Shifting from H4 to L4

Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 8 km/h

(5 mph).

With your foot off the accelerator pedal, depress the clutch

pedal.

Move the front drive control lever.

Shifting from L4 to H4

Depress the clutch pedal.

Move the front drive control lever.

 Four-wheel drive usage frequency (vehicles with A.D.D.)

You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 16 km (10 miles) each

month.

This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

 Shifting between H2 and H4

 If you have trouble shifting in cold weather, reduce your speed or stop the

vehicle and reshift.

 If the four-wheel drive indicator does not go off when you shift from H4 to

H2, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in

reverse.

 Shifting to L4 (vehicles with VSC)

VSC is automatically turned off.

STEP

216

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

 Never shift the front drive control lever from H2 to H4 if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

 For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, use H2 position. Driving

on dry and hard surface roads in H4 or L4 position may cause drive com-

ponent oil leakage, seizure, or other problems resulting in an accident.

Further, it may cause tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

 Avoid turning suddenly in H4 or L4 position. If you do turn suddenly, the

difference in turning speeds between the front and rear wheels may have

a similar effect to braking, thus making driving difficult.

 Securely shift the front drive control lever to H4 or L4. Otherwise, the

transfer may disengage both the front and rear driveshafts from the power-

train and allow the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. If this

happens, the vehicle may be free to roll even if the automatic transmission

is in P.

217

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear differential lock system



: If equipped

The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when wheel

spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or ragged surface.

This differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear

wheels is spinning.

Press the rear differential lock

switch to lock the rear differen-

tial.

At this time, the rear differential

lock indicator will blink. Wait a

few seconds for the system to

complete operation. After the

rear differential is locked, the

indicator will stop blinking and

remain on.

To unlock the rear differential,

push the switch again.

218

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the rear differential lock system

Automatic transmission

4WD models only: Before using the rear differential lock sys-

tem, try shifting the front drive control lever into L4. If this is

not sufficient, use the rear differential lock system as well.

Be sure to stop the wheels.

Press the rear differential lock switch.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.

Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.

Manual transmission

4WD models only: Before using the rear differential lock sys-

tem, try shifting the front drive control lever into L4. If this is

not sufficient, use the rear differential lock system as well.

Be sure to stop the wheels.

Depress the clutch pedal.

Press the rear differential lock switch.

Slowly release the clutch pedal.

After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.

Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.

STEP

219

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Locking the rear differential

The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked.

It is normal operation for the ABS warning light, VSC OFF indicator (if

equipped) and slip indicator (if equipped) to be on at this time.

•ABS

• Brake assist (if equipped)

• VSC (if equipped)

• TRC (if equipped)

 For easy unlocking

Slightly turn the steering wheel in either direction while the vehicle is in

motion.

 Automatic unlocking feature (4WD models)

Shift the front drive control lever to H2 or H4.

Never forget to turn off the switch after using this feature.

 After unlocking the rear differential

Check that the indicator goes off.

220

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To avoid an accident

Failure to observe the following precautions may result in an accident.

 Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning

occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface. Large steering effort

and careful cornering control will be required.

 Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the dif-

ferential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to

possible damage to rear differential lock component parts.

 Do not drive over 8 km/h (5 mph) when the differential is locked.

 Do not keep driving with the rear differential lock switch on.

221

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and

should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if

the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

 Brake assist (if equipped)

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is

depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) (if equipped)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning

on slippery road surfaces

 TRC (Traction Control) (if equipped)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-

ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

 LSD (Limited Slip Differential) (if equipped)

Helps traction when one rear wheel begins to spin by automatically

transmitting driving force to the other rear wheel

222

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

When the VSC/TRC systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slip-

ping or if any of the drive wheels

spins, the slip indicator flashes to

indicate that the VSC/TRC sys-

tems are operating.

Disabling the TRC/VSC systems

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRC/VSC systems

may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to

turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

 Turning off TRC system only

To turn the TRC system off,

quickly press and release the

button.

The slip indicator light will come

on.

Press the button again to turn the

system back on.

223

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Turning off both TRC and VSC systems

To turn the TRC and VSC sys-

tems off, press and hold the but-

ton for more than 3 seconds

while the vehicle is stopped.

The slip indicator light and VSC

OFF indicator light will come on.

Press the button again to turn the

system back on.

224

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRC

 A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is

started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

 Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are

operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

 Reactivation of the TRC/VSC systems after turning off the engine

Turning off the engine after turning off the TRC/VSC systems will automati-

cally reactivate them.

 Reactivation of the TRC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC system will turn on when

vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRC and VSC systems are

turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

 If the VSC OFF indicator light blinks and the slip indicator light comes

on...

It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC and TRC. Consult any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

225

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 The ABS does not operate effectively when

 The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as

excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

 The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick

road.

 Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-

mal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the fol-

lowing situations:

 When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

 When driving with tire chains

 When driving over bumps in the road

 When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

 TRC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-

pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

 When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.

Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the

indicator light flashes.

 When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-

tions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force,

do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

226

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and

total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the

recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are

installed on the vehicle.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or

wheels.

 Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect

the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

227

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) system



DPF system failure warning

Vehicles without the DPF system switch

If the DPF system warning light turns on, drive continuously.

(P. 563)

If the DPF system warning light flashes, have the vehicle inspected

by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, immediately. (P. 560)

: If equipped

When the deposit collected by the filter reaches a predetermined

amount, it is automatically regenerated.

 Regeneration

Regeneration is performed as necessary in accordance with

driving conditions.

 System characteristics

The DPF system has the following characteristics:

 Idle speed increases during regeneration

 The smell of the exhaust gas differs from that of a conven-

tional diesel vehicle

228

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with the DPF system switch

If the DPF system warning light and the indicator light on DPF system

switch turn on or flash, follow the procedure below to regenerate.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (auto-

matic transmission) or N (manual transmission). Release the

clutch pedal.

Do not stop the engine.

Also, make sure that there are no flammable materials near the

exhaust pipe. (P. 230)

Press the switch.

The DPF system warning light

and the indicator light on the

switch will change from solid or

rapid flashing to slow flashing,

and the idling engine speed will

increase.

Regeneration will take around 20

- 30

* minutes to complete.

When the DPF system warning

light goes out, the idling engine

speed will have finished returning

to normal.

*: Differs in accordance with the

outside temperature.

STEP

229

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Regeneration with the DPF system switch (if equipped)

 After pressing the DPF system switch, do not depress the accelerator

pedal or the clutch pedal (manual transmission). Depressing the pedal(s)

will stop regeneration. If regeneration has been stopped, restart regener-

ation as soon as possible.

 If regeneration is carried out while the exhaust pipe is hot (for example

directly after driving), it will take less time than when the engine is cold.

 Replacing the engine oil

Make sure to use an oil of the recommended grade or of matching quality.

(P. 610)

 DPF system warning

Under the following driving conditions, the DPF system warning light may

come on earlier than normal.

 When only driving at low speeds (for example 20 km/h [12 mph] or

below).

 If the engine is turned on and off frequently (if the engine is not left run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a time).

*: Differs in accordance with weather, driving conditions, etc.

230

2-4. Using other driving systems

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 During regeneration

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in burning injuries caused by the hot exhaust

pipe and exhaust gases, or may cause a fire.

 Vehicles with the DPF system switch: Do not carry out regeneration when

the vehicle is in an enclosed area, such as a garage.

 Do not touch the exhaust pipe and exhaust gases during regeneration.

 Do not place flammable materials near

the exhaust pipe.

 Make sure that there are no people

near the exhaust pipe.

231

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If the malfunction indicator light comes on

The malfunction indicator light comes on if you continue driving while the

DPF system warning light is flashing. In this event, damage may be caused

to the vehicle or an accident may occur. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately.

NOTICE

 To prevent the DPF system from failing

 Do not drive for long periods of time while the DPF system warning light is

flashing

 Do not use fuel other than the specified type

 Do not use engine oil other than the recommended type

 Do not modify the exhaust pipe

232

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load:

 Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.

 Be sure all items are secured in place.

 To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage

evenly in the rear deck.

 For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

233

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Things that must not be carried in the rear deck

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the rear deck:

 Receptacles containing gasoline

 Aerosol cans

 Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.

 Except for single-cab models: Do not stack anything behind the front seats

higher than the seatbacks.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle

in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item

may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the ped-

als from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the

driver or passengers, causing an accident:

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger seats (when stacking items)

• Except for single-cab models: On the rear seat (when stacking items)

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

234

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure

someone in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-

dent.

 Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for passen-

gers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.

Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily

injury, in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Load and distribution

 Do not overload your vehicle.

 Do not apply loads unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control

which may cause death or serious injury.

235

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-

ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

 Pre-winter preparations

 Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

 Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-

ity of battery electrolyte.

 Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set

of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains

match the size of the tires.

236

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

 Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is

frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.

Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

 To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,

remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents

in front of the windshield.

 Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

 Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow

that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the

brakes.

 When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-

able to road conditions.

 When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold

latitudes)

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-

mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the

parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it

from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent

inadvertent sliding or creeping.

237

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-

tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing

chains.

 Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

 Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

 Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front

tires.

 Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains

after driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).

 Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

238

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

 Use tires of the specified size.

 Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

 Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-

ified for the snow tires being used.

 Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

 Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,

and may cause death or serious injury.

 Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being

used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.

 Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

 Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect

vehicle handling.

 Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-

trol is maintained.

239

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.

Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, perfor-

mance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. Your safety and

satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cau-

tious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, do not

overload the vehicle or trailer.

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in

accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating condi-

tions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by

towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Ask your local authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional for further details before towing,

as there are additional legal requirements in some countries.

 Weight limits

Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle

Mass), MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and per-

missible draw bar load before towing. (P. 603)

 Towing hitch/bracket

Toyota recommends the use of the Toyota hitch/bracket for your

vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and comparable

quality may also be used.

240

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Important points regarding trailer loads

 Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load

Total trailer weight

Weight of the trailer itself plus the

trailer load should be within the

maximum towing capacity.

Exceeding this weight is danger-

ous. (P. 603)

When towing a trailer, use a fric-

tion coupler or friction stabilizer

(sway control device).

When the total trailer weight is

over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction

stabilizer (sway control device) is

required.

Permissible drawbar load

Allocate the trailer load so that

the drawbar load is greater than

25 kg (55.1 lb.) or 4% of the tow-

ing capacity. Do not let the draw-

bar load exceed the indicated

weight. (P. 603)

241

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Information tag (manufacturer’s label)

Type A

Gross vehicle mass

Maximum permissible rear

axle capacity

Type B

 Gross vehicle mass

The combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo, towing

hitch, total curb mass and drawbar load must not exceed the gross

vehicle mass. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.

 Maximum permissible rear axle capacity

The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maximum

permissible axle capacity. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.

The values for towing capacity were derived from testing conducted at sea

level. Take note that engine output and towing capacity will be reduced at

high altitudes.

242

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball

Vehicles with flat bumper or without bumper

70 mm (2.8 in.)

75 mm (3.0 in.)

20 mm (0.8 in.)

Single-cab models:

355 mm (14.0 in.)

Extra-cab models:

320 mm (12.6 in.)

Double-cab models:

330 mm (13.0 in.)

195 mm (7.7 in.)

1355 mm (53.3 in.)

243

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicles with step bumper

70 mm (2.8 in.)

20 mm (0.8 in.)

35 mm (1.4 in.)

Single-cab models:

360 mm (14.2 in.)

Extra-cab models:

325 mm (12.8 in.)

Double-cab models:

335 mm (13.2 in.)

195 mm (7.7 in.)

1375 mm (54.1 in.)

244

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Tire information

 Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 620)

 Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total

trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-

turer of your trailer.

 Trailer lights

Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every

time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage

the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.

 Break-in schedule

Toyota recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components

should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).

 Safety checks before towing

 Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket hitch ball

is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will

add to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that the total load

exerted on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (P. 240)

 Ensure that the trailer load is secure.

 Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle

if the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust

the extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that

they always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.

245

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Maintenance

 Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle

for towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle com-

pared to normal driving.

 Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for

approximately 1000 km (600 miles).

NOTICE

 When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum

Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that

area.

When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to

corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned which may result in

damage. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attach-

ing a steel bracket.

246

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Guidance

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to

avoid accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind

when towing:

 Checking connections between trailer and lights

Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection

between the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well

as before starting off.

 Practicing driving with a coupled trailer

 Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer

coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.

 When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the

steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the

trailer left or counterclockwise to turn it right. Always rotate a lit-

tle at a time to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you

when reversing to lessen the risk of accident.

 Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance

At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running

ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined

length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may

cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin out of control.

This is especially true when driving on wet or slippery road sur-

faces.

247

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering

Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer collid-

ing with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approach-

ing turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid sudden

braking.

 Important points regarding turning

The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve

than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the

turns wider than you would normally do.

 Important points regarding stability

Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong

crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by

passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check behind when mov-

ing alongside such vehicles. As soon as such vehicle movement

occurs, immediately start to decelerate smoothly by slowly apply-

ing the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight ahead while brak-

ing.

 Passing other vehicles

Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer and

ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before exe-

cuting lane changes.

 Transmission information

To maintain engine braking efficiency when using engine braking,

do not use the transmission in D (automatic transmission) or in the

5th gear (manual transmission). (P. 166, 170)

248

2-5. Driving information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 If the engine overheats

Towing a loaded trailer up a long, steep incline in temperatures

exceeding 30C (85F) may result in the engine overheating. If the

engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is

overheating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 592)

 When parking the vehicle

Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle

and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P

for automatic transmissions, and 1 or R for manual transmissions.

CAUTION

Follow all the precautions described in this section. Failure to do so could

cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

 Trailer towing precautions

When towing, make sure that none of the weight limits are exceeded.

(P. 240)

 Vehicle speed in towing

Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.

 Before descending hills or long declines

Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while

descending steep or long down hill grades.

 Operation of the brake pedal

Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods of time.

Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.

249

2-5. Driving information

When driving

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To avoid accident or injury

The gross combination mass (sum of your vehicle mass plus its load and the

total trailer mass) must not exceed the following:

Single-cab models

5140 kg (11332 lb.)

Extra-cab models

5120 kg (11288 lb.): 4WD models

5090 kg (11222 lb.): Pre Runner

Double-cab models

5220 kg (11508 lb.): 1KD-FTV engine for Norway

5230 kg (11530 lb.): 1KD-FTV engine except for Norway

5180 kg (11420 lb.): 2KD-FTV engine, 4WD models for Norway

5190 kg (11442 lb.): 2KD-FTV engine, 4WD models except for Norway

5100 kg (11244 lb.): 2KD-FTV engine, Pre Runner

250

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Manual air conditioning

system ............................ 252

Automatic air

conditioning system........ 258

Power heater .................... 265

Rear window defogger

switch.............................. 266

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types........... 268

Using the radio.................. 270

Using the CD player.......... 275

Playing MP3 and WMA

discs ............................... 282

Operating an iPod............. 290

Operating a USB

memory........................... 300

Optimal use of

the audio system ............ 309

Using the AUX port........... 313

Using the steering wheel

audio switches................ 314

Interior features

251

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Touch screen.................... 317

Setup menu ...................... 319

Audio system .................... 327

Using the radio ................. 331

Using the CD player ......... 336

Playing an audio CD and

MP3/WMA discs ............. 337

Listening to an iPod .......... 350

Listening to a USB

memory........................... 360

Using the AUX port........... 369

Listening to Bluetooth

audio............................... 370

Using the steering wheel

audio switches................ 384

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone).......... 387

Using the Bluetooth

phone ............................. 395

Setting the hands-free

system ............................ 411

Bluetooth

settings........... 428

3-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list................ 438

• Personal lights................ 439

• Interior light..................... 439

3-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 440

• Glove box ....................... 442

• Console box.................... 443

• Cup holders .................... 444

• Bottle holders.................. 446

• Auxiliary boxes ............... 447

3-6. Other interior features

Sun visors......................... 449

Vanity mirror ..................... 450

Clock................................. 451

Ashtray.............................. 452

Cigarette lighter ................ 453

Power outlet...................... 454

Seat heaters ..................... 455

Floor mat........................... 457

Compass........................... 459

Deck hooks....................... 465

252

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system



: If equipped

Outside/recirculated air mode lever

Air outlet selection dial

Temperature control dial

Fan speed control dial

Cooling and dehumidification function on/off button (if equipped)

253

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Adjusting the settings

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial the

clockwise (increase) or the counterclockwise (decrease).

Set the dial to “OFF” turns off the fan.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control

dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

If the “A/C” button is not pressed, the system will blow ambient tem-

perature air or heated air. (if equipped)

To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the

desired position.

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can

also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

Defogging the windshield

Set the air outlet selection dial to

position.

Set the outside/recirculated air

mode lever to outside mode if

recirculated air mode is used.

Perform the following operations accordingly:

 To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.

 To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con-

trol dial.

 If the dehumidification function is not operating, press the

“A/C” button to operate the dehumidification function.

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the

air flow and temperature up.

STEP

254

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

: Some models

Air flows to the feet.

: Some models

255

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates.

: Some models

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Move the outside/recirculated air mode lever.

The mode switches between (introduces air from outside the vehi-

cle) and (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the lever is

moved.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to close the

vent.

256

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Fogging up of the windows

 The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning the “A/C” button on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and

defog the windshield effectively.

 If you turn the “A/C” button off, the windows may fog up more easily.

 The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

 Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-

side/recirculated air mode lever to the recirculated air mode. This is effective

in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling

operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior

effectively.

 When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when the “A/C” button

is pressed.

 Air conditioning odors

 During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

 To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

 Air conditioning filter

P. 5 11

257

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the

windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

258

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Automatic air conditioning system



: If equipped

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the

temperature setting.

Air intake display Recirculated air mode button

Cooling and dehumidification

function on/off button

Fan speed display

Air outlet display

Outside air mode button

“OFF” button

Automatic

mode button

Fan speed

control buttons

Air outlet

selector buttons

Temperature

display

Temperature

control buttons

Windshield

defogger button

259

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the automatic air conditioning system

Press the “AUTO” button.

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and

fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

Press to increase the temperature and to

decrease the temperature.

Press the “A/C” button.

The air cooling and dehumidification function switches

between on and off each time the button is pressed.

Adjusting the settings manually

To adjust the fan speed, press to increase the fan

speed and to decrease the fan speed.

Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature settings, press to increase

the temperature and to decrease the temperature.

To change the air outlets, press , , or

STEP

260

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function

operates and fan speed

increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air

mode button to outside air mode

if the recirculated air mode is

used. (It may switch automati-

cally.)

To defog the windshield and the

side windows early, turn the air

flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode,

press again when the

windshield is defogged.

Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

261

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

: Some models

Air flows to the feet.

: Some models

Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates.

: Some models

262

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press to switch to recirculated air mode and press

to switch to outside air mode.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to close the

vent.

263

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting

and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow

immediately after the “AUTO” button is pressed.

 Fogging up of the windows

 The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning the “A/C” button on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and

defog the windshield effectively.

 If you turn the “A/C” button off, the windows may fog up more easily.

 The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

 Outside/recirculated air mode

 When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the

outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is

effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior.

During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool

the vehicle interior effectively.

 Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on

the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

 When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when the “A/C” button

is touched.

264

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Air conditioning odors

 During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

 To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning system is started in AUTO mode.

 Air conditioning filter

P. 5 11

CAUTION

 To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the

windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

265

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Power heater



: If equipped

 Power heater can be operated when

The engine is running.

This feature is used to keep the cabin warm in cold conditions.

Turns the power heater on/off

If you do not turn the switch to

off, the engine speed is

increased whenever the

engine is started.

266

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Rear window defogger switch



: If equipped

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-

drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles without automatic air conditioning system

Turns the rear window and

outside rear view mirror defog-

gers on/off

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system

Turns the rear window and

outside rear view mirror defog-

gers on/off

The defoggers will automati-

cally turn off after approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

267

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 The defoggers can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 The outside rear view mirror defoggers

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror

defoggers on.

CAUTION

 When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can

become very hot and burn you.

268

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types



: If equipped

CD player with AM/FM radio

Title Page

Using the radio P. 270

Using the CD player P. 275

Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 282

Operating an iPod P. 290

Operating a USB memory P. 300

Optimal use of the audio system P. 309

Using the AUX port P. 313

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 314

269

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular

phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is

operating.

CAUTION

 Certification for the disc player

This product is a class 1 laser product.

 A laser beam leak may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

 Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

 To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

270

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the radio

Setting station presets

Search for the desired stations by turning , or pressing

“” or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Press and hold the button (from the 1 button to the 6 button)

the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.

VolumePower

Seeking the

frequency

Displaying station list

AM/FM mode buttons

Station selector

Adjusting the frequency or selecting items

Back button

AF/region code/TA mode setup

STEP

271

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the station list

 Updating the station list

Press the “LIST” button.

The station list will be displayed.

Press the 4 (UPDT) button to update the list.

Available stations will be listed on the display.

To cancel the updating process, press .

 Selecting a station from the station list

Press the “LIST” button.

The station list will be displayed.

Turn to select a station.

Press to tune in the station.

To return to the previous display, press .

STEP

272

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station.

 Listening to stations of the same network

Press the “SETUP” button.

Turn to “RADIO” and press .

Turn as corresponds to the desired mode: “FM AF” or

“REG”.

Press to select “ON” or “OFF”.

“FM AF ON” mode: The station among those of the same network

with strong reception is selected.

“REG ON” mode: The station among those of the same network

with strong reception and broadcasting the

same program is selected.

STEP

273

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Traffic information

Press the “SETUP” button.

Turn to “RADIO” and press .

Turn to “TA” mode.

Press to select “ON” or “OFF”.

“TP” mode: The system automatically switches to traffic informa-

tion when a broadcast with a traffic information signal

is received.

The station returns to the previous one when the traffic infor-

mation ends.

“TA” mode: The system automatically switches to traffic informa-

tion when a broadcast with a traffic information signal

is received. In FM modes, the system will be mute

unless traffic information is being broadcast.

The audio system returns to the previous mode when the

traffic information ends.

STEP

274

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement

function)

If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a

traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic

announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station

broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic

information begins.

 Reception sensitivity

 It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the con-

tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength

and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.

 The radio antenna is mounted on the roof. The antenna can be removed

from the base by turning.

 Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio

The optional radio antenna and tuner are necessary for the use of Digital

Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage, retract the antenna in the following cases

 The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.

 A cover will be put on the roof.

 When driving through an automatic car wash.

 Any other cases where there is a risk of touching surrounding parts.

275

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the CD player

VolumePower

Displaying track list

Selecting a track,

fast-forwarding

or reversing

Playback

Displaying text message

Repeat play

Random playback

CD eject

Back button

Selecting a track

276

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Loading a CD

Insert a CD.

Ejecting a CD

Press and remove the CD.

Selecting a track

Turn , or press “” to move up or “” to move down using the

“SEEK/TRACK” button until the desired track number is displayed.

Selecting a track from a track list

Press the “LIST” button.

The track list will be displayed.

Turn and press to select a track.

To return to the previous display, press or the “LIST” button.

STEP

277

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

Random playback

Press the 2 (RDM) button.

Songs are played in random order.

To cancel, press the 2 (RDM) button again.

Repeat play

Press the 1 (RPT) button.

To cancel, press the 1 (RPT) button again.

Switching the display

Press the “TEXT” button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order: Track no./Elapsed time  CD title  Track title  Artist name

278

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected.

 Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding the “TEXT” button

for 1 second or more enables to display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If the “TEXT” button is pressed for more than 1 second again or has not

been operated for more than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12

characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

279

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.

“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the

player. Wait for a while and then press the “CD” button. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played.

 Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.

 Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

 If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods of time

The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.

280

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters or Dual

Disc.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

 CDs that have a diameter that is not 12

cm (4.7 in.)

 Low-quality and deformed CDs

 CDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area

 CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have

had the label peeled off

281

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

 Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

 Do not apply oil to the CD player.

 Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

 Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

 Do not insert more than one CD at a

time.

282

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

VolumePower

Displaying

track list

Playback

Displaying text message

Back button

Selecting a file

Repeat play

Random playback

Disc eject

Selecting a file,

fast-forwarding

or reversing

Selecting a folder

283

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

P. 276

Selecting a folder

 Selecting a folder one at a time

Press the 3 ( ) or 4 ( ) button to select the desired folder.

 Selecting a folder and file from folder lists

Press the “LIST” button.

The folder list will be displayed.

Turn and press to select a folder and a file.

To return to the previous display, press .

To exit, press the “LIST” button.

 Returning to the first folder

Press and hold the 3 ( ) button until you hear a beep.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

Selecting files

Turn , or press “” or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button to select

the desired file.

STEP

284

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Random playback

Pressing the 2 (RDM) button changes modes in the following order:

Folder random

 Disc random  Off.

Repeat play

Pressing the 1 (RPT) button changes modes in the following order:

File repeat

 Folder repeat*  Off.

*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected

Switching the display

Press the “TEXT” button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order: Track no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name 

Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name

285

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 CD player protection feature

P. 278

 Display

P. 278

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the

player.

“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside

the player. Wait for a while and then press the “CD” but-

ton. Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be

played.

“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the

CD.

286

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

 Lens cleaners

P. 279

 If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods of time

P. 279

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to

the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

*Compatible with VBR

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

287

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

*Only compatible with 2-channel playback

 Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is

not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the

disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

 Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used:

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not

be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

288

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

 Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play

discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can

be played.

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

 MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc

are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file

is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you

do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-

essary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data

cannot be played.

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

289

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Playback

• To play an MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed

bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,

depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may

take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may

not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-

marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

NOTICE

 CDs and adapters that cannot be used

P. 280

 CD player precautions

P. 281

290

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Operating an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

 Connecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect

an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if

it is not turned on.

Press the “USB•AUX” button.

STEP

291

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Control panel

VolumePower

Selecting

a song,

fast-forwarding

or reversing

iPod menu mode

Shuffle playback

Playback

Displaying text message

iPod menu/Song

selection or

displays lists

Repeat play

Displays lists

Back button

Playback

292

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a play mode

Press the 6 (BROWSE) button to select iPod menu mode.

Turning changes the play mode in the following order:

“PLAYLISTS”  “ARTISTS”  “ALBUMS”  “SONGS” 

“PODCASTS”  “GENRES”  “COMPOSERS” 

“AUDIOBOOKS”

Press to select the desired play mode.

STEP

293

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Play mode list

 Selecting a list

Turn to display the first selection list.

Press to select the desired item.

Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.

To return to the previous selection list, press .

Play mode

First

selection

Second

selection

Third

selection

Fourth

selection

“PLAYLISTS”

Playlists

select

Songs select - -

“ARTISTS” Artists select Albums select Songs select -

“ALBUMS” Albums select Songs select - -

“SONGS” Songs select - - -

“PODCASTS”

Podcasts

select

Episodes

select

- -

“GENRES” Genre select Artists select Albums select Songs select

“

COMPOSERS

”

Composers

select

Albums select Songs select -

“

AUDIOBOOKS

”

Audiobooks

select

Chapters

select

- -

STEP

294

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting songs

Turn , or press “” or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button to select

the desired song.

Selecting a song from the song list

Press the “LIST” button.

The song list will be displayed.

Turn to select a song.

Press to play the song.

To return to the previous display, press .

Playing songs

To play a song, press the 3 (PLAY) button.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

STEP

295

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Shuffle playback

Pressing the 2 (RDM) button changes modes in the following order:

Track shuffle  Album shuffle  Off.

Repeat play

Press the 1 (RPT) button.

To cancel, press the 1 (RPT) button again.

Switching the display

Press the “TEXT” button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order: Track no./Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

Press the “SETUP” button to enter iPod menu mode.

Turning changes sound modes. (P. 309)

STEP

296

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 About iPod

 “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic acces-

sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,

respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per-

formance standards.

 Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this

accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

 iPod functions

 When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod

mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last

used.

 Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once

again may resolve some malfunctions.

 While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own

controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system

instead.

 iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect

your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-

ual.

297

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Display

P. 278

 Error messages

“ERROR 1”: This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.

“ERROR 3”: This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.

“ERROR 4”: This indicates that an over current error has occurred.

“ERROR 5”: This indicates that an iPod communication error has

occurred.

“ERROR 6”: This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.

“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“NO PLAYLISTS”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in

a selected playlist.

“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compati-

ble. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

298

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Compatible models

The following iPod

, iPod nano

, iPod classic

, iPod touch

and iPhone

devices can be used with this system.

 Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)

• iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (6th generation)

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

• iPhone 4

• iPhone 3GS

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some

models might be incompatible with this system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

 Maximum number of lists in device: 9999

 Maximum number of songs in device: 65535

 Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

299

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to iPod

 Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the player.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is

connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or

its terminal.

300

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Operating a USB memory

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the

vehicle speakers.

 Connecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB

memory if it is not turned on.

Press the “USB•AUX” button.

STEP

301

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Control panel

VolumePower

Displaying

folder lists

Playback

Displaying text message

Back button

Selecting a file

Repeat play

Random playback

Selecting a file,

fast-forwarding

or reversing

Selecting a folder

302

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a folder

 Selecting folders one at a time

Press the 3 ( ) or 4 ( ) button to select the desired folder.

 Selecting a folder and a file from folder lists

Press the “LIST” button.

The folder list will be displayed.

Turn and press to select a folder and a file.

To return to the previous display, press the .

 Returning to the first folder

Press and hold the 3 ( ) button until you hear a beep.

STEP

303

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting files

Turn or press “” or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button to select

the desired file.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/

TRACK” button.

Random playback

Pressing the 2 (RDM) button changes modes in the following order:

Folder random  Disc random  Off.

304

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Repeat play

Pressing the 1 (RPT) button changes modes in the following order:

File repeat

 Folder repeat*  Off.

*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected

Switching the display

Press the “TEXT” button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order: Track no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name 

Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name

 USB memory functions

 Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the

device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-

able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-

function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device

and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

 If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-

nected and reconnected, format the memory.

 Display

P. 278

305

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB

memory.

 USB memory

 Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback

 Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)

• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be

displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and

to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

306

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)

MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

307

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

 MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in

the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished,

the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more

quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than

MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to

USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the

first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-

tents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from

the same point in which it was last used.

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).

308

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to USB memory

 Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory

while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB

memory or its terminal.

309

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Optimal use of the audio system

Displays the current mode

Changes the following set-

tings

• Sound quality and vol-

ume balance

P. 3 11

The sound quality and

balance setting can be

changed to produce the

best sound.

• Automatic Sound Level-

izer on/off

P. 3 1 2

Selecting the mode

310

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the audio control function

 Changing sound quality modes

Press the “SETUP” button.

Turn to select “SOUND”.

Press .

Turn as corresponds to the desired mode.

“BAS”, “TRE”, “FAD”, “BAL”, or “ASL”

Press .

STEP

311

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Adjusting sound quality

Turning adjusts the level.

: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

: For vehicles equipped with two speakers, no sound will be emitted if

R7 is selected.

Mode

displayed

Sound

quality mode

Level

Turn coun-

terclockwise

Turn

clockwise

“BAS”*

Bass -5 to 5

Low High

“TRE”*

Treble -5 to 5

“FAD”*

Front/rear

volume

balance

F7 to R7 Shifts to rear

Shifts to

front

“BAL”

Left/right

volume

balance

L7 to R7 Shifts to left

Shifts to

right

312

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

When ASL is selected, turning clockwise changes the amount

of ASL in the order of LOW, MID, HIGH and OFF.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-

cle speed.

 Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (type A)

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS



and SRS TruBass



audio

enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode

except AM radio mode.

 FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and

symbol are trademarks of SRS

Labs, Inc.

FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from

SRS Labs, Inc.

 SRS FOCUS



raises the audio image from non-optimally placed speak-

ers up to the natural listening height at ear level.

SRS TruBass



enhances the perception of bass frequencies to provide

deep, rich bass response from any size speaker.

313

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the AUX port

 Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All the other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

 When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable

audio device.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen

to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device

Press the “USB•AUX” button.

STEP

314

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the steering wheel audio switches



: If equipped

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Increases/decreases vol-

ume

Radio mode:

Selects a radio

station

CD mode: Selects a track,

file (MP3 and

WMA)

iPod mode: Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and

folder

Turns the power on, selects

an audio source

315

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Turning the power on

Press the “MODE” button when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source

Press the “MODE” button when the audio system is turned on. The

audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed.

AM  FM1  DAB  CD mode 

iPod or USB memory mode  AUX  AM

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Silencing a sound

Press and hold the “MODE” button.

To cancel, press and hold the “MODE” button.

316

3-2. Using the audio system

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a radio station

Press the “MODE” button to select the radio mode.

Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on the but-

ton until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song

Press the “MODE” button to select CD, iPod or USB memory

mode.

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or

song.

Selecting a folder

Press the “MODE” button to select CD or USB memory mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

 To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

STEP

317

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio

system and hands-free system, etc.

This illustration is for left-hand drive vehicle.

Button Function

“MEDIA” Audio system (P. 327 )

“” Hands-free system (P. 387)

“SETUP” Setup menu (P. 319)

“MAP NAV”

Add-on external system with

functions such as a navigation

system

318

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When using the touch screen

 If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to

be operating slightly slower than normal.

 The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-

glasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display

settings” screen (P. 322) or remove your sunglasses.

NOTICE

 To avoid damaging the touch screen

 To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your

finger.

 Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.

 Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical

cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

319

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Setup menu

You can change the “touch screen” to your desired setting.

Press “SETUP” to display the “Setup” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Switch Page

“General” P. 320

“Display” P. 322

“Bluetooth*” P. 428

“Telephone” P. 411

“Audio” P. 324

320

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

General settings

This screen is used for various settings such as language selection

and setting operation sounds.

Press “SETUP”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup” screen.

Select language (P. 321)

Beep on/off

Display captured image on/off

“On” or “Off” can be selected to

display captured image/iPod

cover art in the screen.

Animation on/off

The animation effect for audio

source selection screen can be

set to “On” or “Off”.

Personal data can be deleted.

(P. 321)

When you complete settings, touch “OK”.

STEP

321

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Selecting a language

Touch “Language” on the “General settings” screen.

Select the desired language.

The desired one of the 7 lan-

guages can be selected.

Touch “OK”.

 Delete personal data

Touch “Delete personal data” on the “General settings”

screen.

Touch “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as

data cannot be retrieved once

deleted.

STEP

322

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch “Yes”.

The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default

settings.

• Phonebook data

• Call history data

• Speed dial data

• Bluetooth



devices data

• Phone sound settings

• Detailed Bluetooth



settings

• Audio settings

Display settings

Press “SETUP”.

Touch “Display” on the “Setup” screen.

Turn off screen

The screen is turned off. To turn it

on, press any button such as

“MEDIA” or “SETUP”.

Change to day mode

(P. 323)

Adjust screen contrast/bright-

ness (P. 323)

Adjust screen contrast/bright-

ness of rear view monitor

camera (P. 323)

STEP

323

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Changing between day mode and night mode

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.

However, the screen can be switched to day mode by touching

“Day mode”.

The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until

“Day mode” is touched again.

 Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness

Touch “General” or “Camera” on the “Display settings” screen.

Adjust the display as desired

using “+” or “-”.

Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”

using the “<<” or “>>”.

Touch “OK”.

STEP

“-” “+”

“Contrast” Weaker Stronger

“Brightness” Darker Brighter

STEP

324

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Audio settings

Press “SETUP”.

Touch “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

Adjust sound settings

(P. 324)

Radio settings (P. 326)

 Adjust sound settings

Touch “Sound settings” on the “Audio settings” screen.

“Sound” tab

Touch “-” or “+” to adjust

the treble, mid or bass to

a level between -5 to 5.

Touch “Front” or “Rear” to

adjust the front/rear audio

balance to a level between

Front 7 and Rear 7.

Touch “L” or “R” to adjust

the left/right audio balance

to a level between L7 and

R7.

STEP

325

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

“DSP” tab

Automatic sound levelizer

(ASL)

Adjust the ASL level in the order

of “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.

When you complete settings, touch “OK”.

 The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode

separately.

 About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehi-

cle speed.

STEP

326

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Radio settings

Touch “Radio settings” on the “Audio settings” screen.

FM Traffic announcement on/

off

The system automatically

switches to traffic information

when a broadcast with a traffic

information signal is received.

FM Alternative frequency on/

off

The station among those of the

same network with strong recep-

tion is selected.

Regional code change on/off

The station among those of the

same network with strong recep-

tion and broadcasting the same

program is selected.

When you complete settings, touch “OK”.

STEP

327

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Audio system

Press “MEDIA” to display the audio control screen.

Title Page

Using the radio P. 331

Using the CD player P. 336

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs P. 337

Listening to an iPod P. 350

Listening to a USB memory P. 360

Using the AUX port P. 369

Listening to Bluetooth

audio P. 370

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 384

328

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Switching the audio source

Press “MEDIA” to display audio control screen.

Touch “Source” or press

“MEDIA” to display the audio

source selection screen.

Touch the desired audio source.

: To scroll the screen.

:Change to the list style

screen as follows.

STEP

329

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

List screen operation

When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through

the list.

: To scroll to the next or

previous page.

:If appears to the right of

titles, the complete titles are

too long for the display.

Touch this button to scroll to

the title.

Turn to move the cur-

sor box to select a desired item

from the list, and press

to play it. The track that is being

played is highlighted.

 Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular

phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is

operating.

330

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Laser product

This product is a class 1 laser product.

 A laser beam leak may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

 Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.

Refer servicing to qualified personal.

 Laser power: No hazardous.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is

off.

 To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

331

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the radio

Touch “AM” or “FM” on the audio source selection screen.

 Audio control screen

Pressing “MEDIA” displays the audio control screen from any

screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection

screen appears

Displaying the FM station

list

Preset stations

Volume

Selecting a frequency

Displaying the source selection

or audio control screen

Power

Adjusting

the frequency

332

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a station

 Seek tuning

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”.

 Manual tuning

Turn .

 Preset stations

Touch desired preset stations (1 to 6).

Using the FM station list

 Selecting a station from the FM station list

Touch “Station list”.

To return to the preset screen, touch “Presets”.

Touch desired station selector (1

to 6).

Change the station list using

or .

The FM station list automatically

searches for FM broadcasts by a

band scan to generate a list of

available radio stations.

STEP

333

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Setting station presets

Search for desired stations by turning or pressing

“” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”.

Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 to 6) until you

hear a beep.

RDS (Radio Data System)

 Listening to stations of the same network

FM Alternative frequency: The station among those of the same

network with strong reception is

selected.

FM Alternative frequency on/off (P. 326)

Regional code change: The station among those of the same

network with strong reception and

broadcasting the same program is

selected.

Regional code change on/off (P. 326)

STEP

334

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 FM Traffic announcement

The system automatically

switches to traffic information

when a broadcast with a traffic

information signal is received.

“TP” (Traffic program) will appear

on the screen. The station returns

to the previous one when the traf-

fic information ends.

FM Traffic announcement on/off

(P. 326)

 Certification for the radio (for Italy)

IL PRODUTTORE Panasonic Corporation Automotive Systems Company

4261, Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama, 224-8520, JAPAN DI QUESTO

APPARECCHIO MODELLO 86140 0K130, 86140 0K120 DICHIARA CHE

ESSO È CONFORME AL D.M.28.08.1995 Nr.548, OTTEMPERANDO ALLE

PRESCRIZIONI DI CUI AL D.M.25.6.1985 (PARAGRAFO 3.ALL.A) ED AL

D.M.27.8.1987 (PARAGRAFO 3.ALL.I).

335

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement

function)

If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a

traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (Traffic

announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station

broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic

information begins.

 Reception sensitivity

 Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-

tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength

and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

 The radio antenna is mounted on the rear roof. The antenna can be

removed from the base by turning it.

 Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio

The optional radio antenna and tuner are necessary for the use of Digital

Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio.

336

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the CD player

Loading a disc

Insert a disc into the disc slot.

Ejecting a disc

Press and remove the disc.

Volume

Selecting a track and file/

fast-forwarding and reversing

Displaying the source selection

or audio control screen

Power

Ejecting a

disc

Selecting a track and fileDisc slot

337

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

Insert disc or touch “CD” on the audio source selection screen with

a disc inserted.

 Audio control screen

Pressing “MEDIA” displays the audio control screen from any

screens of the selected source.

Audio CD

MP3/WMA disc

Audio source selection

screen appears

Displaying the track/file list

Pause

Touch to play

Repeat play

Random playback

Displaying the folder list

338

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks (Audio CD)

 Selecting a track

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn to select the

desired track number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”.

 Selecting a track from the track list

Touch “Tracks” on the screen.

Touch the desired track number.

STEP

339

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files (MP3/WMA disc)

 Selecting a file

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn to select the

desired file number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”

until you hear a beep.

 Selecting a file from the file list

Touch “Files” on the screen.

Touch the desired file number.

STEP

340

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA disc)

Touch “Folders” on the screen.

Touch the desired folder number.

Touch the desired file number.

STEP

341

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Random playback

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

Audio CD

MP3/WMA disc

: Random play on the disc

: Off

: Random play on the folder

: Random play in all the folders

: Off

342

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Repeat play

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

Audio CD

MP3/WMA disc

 Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.

: Track repeat

: Off

: File repeat

: Folder repeat

: Off

343

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Error messages

Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the prob-

lem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

Message Cause Correction procedures

Check

DISC

• The disc is dirty or damaged.

• The disc is inserted upside

down.

• The disc is not playable with

the player.

• Clean the disc.

• Insert the disc correctly.

• Confirm the disc is play-

able with the player.

DISC error

There is a malfunction within

the system.

Eject the disc.

No music

files found

This indicates that no play-

able data is included in the

disc.

Eject the disc.

344

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected.

 If disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.

 Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to

the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-

aural

345

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)

 Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is

not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the

disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

 Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

UDF (2.01 or lower)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be

displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

346

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

 Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play

discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can

be played.

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

 MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc

are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file

is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you

do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-

essary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data

cannot be played.

347

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

 Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,

depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3

and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-

ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of play-

back may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may

take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may

not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries

348

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs, 8 cm (3 in.) disc adapters or Dual

Discs.

Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.

 Discs that have a diameter that is not

12 cm (4.7 in.).

 Low-quality or deformed discs.

 Discs with a transparent or translucent

recording area.

 Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have

had the label peeled off.

349

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or

the player itself.

 Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

 Do not apply oil to the player.

 Store discs away from direct sunlight.

 Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

350

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Listening to an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

Touch “iPod” on the audio source selection screen.

VolumePower

Selecting a song/fast-forwarding

and reversing

Displaying the source selection

or audio control screen

Selecting a song

351

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Audio control screen

Pressing “MEDIA” displays the audio control screen from any

screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection

screen appears

Selecting the play mode

Displaying the song list

Pause

Touch to playback

Repeat play

Shuffle play

352

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Connecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect the

iPod.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it

is not turned on.

Playing an iPod

 Play/Pause

Touch or to Play/Pause.

 Selecting a play mode

Touch “Browse” on the screen.

Select the desired play mode by

touching the “Playlists”, “Artists”,

“Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”,

“Audio books”, “Genres” or

“Composers” tabs.

STEP

353

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing songs

 Selecting one song at a time

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn to select the

desired song.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”

until you hear a beep.

 Selecting a song from the list

Touch “Songs” on the screen.

Touch the desired song.

STEP

354

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Shuffle play

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

When a large number of songs is stored in an iPod, shuffle selection may

take time.

Repeat play

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

: Playing the songs in shuffle

: Playing the albums in the iPod in shuffle

: Off

: Repeating the song

: Off

355

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 About iPod

 “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic acces-

sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,

respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per-

formance standards.

 Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this

accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

 iPod cover art

 Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be dis-

played.

 This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 320)

 It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be oper-

ated while the cover art display is in process.

 Only iPod cover art that is saved in a JPEG format can be displayed.

356

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 iPod functions

 When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod

mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last

used.

 Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as

opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-

necting it once again may resolve the problem.

 While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own

controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system

instead.

 When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If

so, charge the iPod before use.

 Supported models (P. 358)

 iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect

your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on

how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.

357

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Error messages

“Connection error.”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“There are no songs available for playback.”:

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“No items available.”: This indicates that some available songs are not found

in a selected playlist.

“Please check the iPod firmware version.”:

This indicates that the software version is not compati-

ble.

Please check the compatible models. (P. 358)

“iPod authorization failed.”:

This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.

Please check your iPod.

358

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Compatible models

The following iPod

, iPod nano

, iPod classic

, iPod touch

and iPhone

devices can be used with this system.

 Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)

• iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (6th generation)

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

• iPhone 4

• iPhone 3GS

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some

models might be incompatible with this system.

359

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminal

 Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle

may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is

connected.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

360

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Listening to a USB memory

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the

vehicle speakers.

Touch “USB” on the audio source selection screen.

VolumePower

Selecting a file/fast-forwarding

and reversing

Displaying the source selection

or audio control screen

Selecting a file

361

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Audio control screen

Pressing “MEDIA” displays the audio control screen from any

screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection

screen appears

Displaying the folder list

Displaying the file list

Pause

Touch to playback

Repeat play

Random playback

362

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Connecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect the

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB

memory if it is not turned on.

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files

 Selecting one file at time

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn to select the

desired file.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”

until you hear a beep.

 Selecting a file from the list

Touch “Files” on the screen.

Touch the desired file number.

STEP

363

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a folder

Touch “Folders” on the screen.

Touch the desired folder number.

Touch the desired file number.

STEP

364

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Random playback

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

Repeat play

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

: Random play on the folder

: Random play in all the folders

: Off

: File repeat

: Folder repeat

: Off

365

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 USB memory functions

 Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the

device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-

able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-

function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device

and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

 If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-

nected and reconnected, format the memory.

 Error messages for USB memory

“Connection error.”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its

connection.

“There are no files available for playback.”:

This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in

the USB memory.

 USB memory

 Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.

 Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)

• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be

displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

366

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and

to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-

aural

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

367

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

 MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the

USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the

first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more

quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3

or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to

USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the

first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-

tents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the

same point in which it was last used.

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).

368

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3

and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-

ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of play-

back may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not connect a USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the USB memory or its terminal

 Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory

while it is connected.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

369

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the AUX port

 Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

 When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable

audio device.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen

to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

Touch “AUX” on the audio source selection screen.

STEP

370

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Listening to Bluetooth

audio

The Bluetooth

audio system enables users to enjoy music played

on a portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communi-

cation. This audio system supports Bluetooth

, a wireless data sys-

tem capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your

portable player does not support Bluetooth

, the Bluetooth

audio

system will not function.

Touch “BT” on the audio source selection screen.

VolumePower

Selecting a track/fast-forwarding

and reversing

Displaying the source selection

or audio control screen

Selecting a track

371

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Audio control screen

Pressing “MEDIA” displays the audio control screen from any

screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection

screen appears

Displaying the album list

Displaying the track list

Connecting a Bluetooth

audio player

Playback

Pause

Repeat play

Random playback

372

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Status display

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge

on the screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Indicators Conditions

Connection status

Good Not connected

Battery charge

Full Empty

373

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Registering a Bluetooth

audio player

To use the Bluetooth

audio system, you need to register your porta-

ble audio player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your

music on the vehicle’s audio system.

You can register up to 5 devices in the system.

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.

Touch “Connect”.

Touch “Yes”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

374

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Input the passcode displayed on

the screen into your portable

audio player.

For the operation of the portable

audio player, see the manual that

comes with your portable audio

player.

Passcodes are not required for

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)

compatible Bluetooth

devices.

Depending on the device, you

may need to select “Yes” to regis-

ter, or “No” to cancel on your

Bluetooth

device.

If you want to cancel it, select

“Cancel”.

If a completion message is dis-

played, registration is complete.

If an error message is displayed,

follow the guidance on the screen

to try again.

STEP

375

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting the Bluetooth

audio player

If multiple Bluetooth

devices are registered, follow the procedure

below to select the Bluetooth

device to be used. You may only use

one device at a time.

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.

Touch “Connect”.

Touch the device to connect.

“Add new”: Registering a

Bluetooth

device. (P. 429)

The selection indicator is dis-

played on left side of the selected

device name.

The Bluetooth

mark is dis-

played when you connected the

device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

376

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Connecting the Bluetooth

audio player

There are two connection methods available.

 When the connection method is set to “From vehicle”

When the portable audio player is on standby for the connection, it

will be automatically connected whenever the engine switch is in

either the “ACC” or “ON” position.

 When the connection method is set to “From audio player”

Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth

audio

system.

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.

Touch “Connect”.

Touch the device to connect.

A message is shown if connection

has been successful.

If connection fails, a message will

be displayed and connection will

be re-attempted.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

377

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Playing Bluetooth

audio

Touch or to play/pause.

Some titles and controls may not

be displayed depending on the

type of portable audio player.

378

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a track

 Selecting a track

Press “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn to select the

desired track number.

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on “SEEK/TRACK”

until you hear a beep.

 Selecting a track from the list

Touch “Tracks” on the screen.

Touch the desired track.

STEP

379

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting an album

Touch “Browse” on the screen.

Touch the desired album.

Touch the desired track.

STEP

380

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Random playback

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

Repeat play

Each time is touched, the mode changes in the following

order:

: Random play on the album

: Random play in all the album

: Off

: Track repeat

: Album repeat

: Off

381

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When using the Bluetooth

audio system

 In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• If the portable audio player is turned off

• If the portable audio player is not connected

• If the portable audio player’s battery is low

 There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Blue-

tooth

audio play.

 Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the

system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be

available.

 Bluetooth

antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the

seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal

objects, connection status may deteriorate.

 Battery charge/signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player, and

this system does not have a charging function.

 About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are

owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any

use of such marks by Panasonic Corpo-

ration is under license. Other trademarks

and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

382

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Compatible models

Portable audio players must correspond to the specifications.

 Bluetooth

specifications:

Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)

 Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)

This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sounds to the

headphone.

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

This is a profile to remote control the A/V equipment.

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the

type of portable audio player.

 Certification

P. 393

 Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to a poor reception when the

engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system automatically

reconnects the portable audio player when possible.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instruc-

tions below to reconnect:

 Select the portable audio player again

 Enter the portable audio player

 When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 321)

383

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not use the portable audio player or connect the Bluetooth

system.

NOTICE

 When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable audio player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehi-

cle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player.

384

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Volume

Radio mode: Selects radio

stations

CD mode:

Selects tracks/files and

folders (MP3/WMA)

iPod mode: Select songs

USB memory mode:

Selects files and folders

Bluetooth

audio mode:

Selects tracks and

albums

Turns the power on, selects

audio source

385

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Turning on the power

Press “MODE” when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source

Press “MODE” when the audio system is turned on. The audio source

changes as follows each time “MODE” is pressed. If no discs are

inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that

mode will be skipped.

FMCD playeriPod or USB memoryBluetooth

audioAUXAM

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Hold the switch in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the

volume.

Silencing a sound

Press and hold the “MODE”.

To cancel, press and hold the “MODE”.

386

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting a radio station

Press “MODE” to select the radio mode.

Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.

To seek stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song

Press “MODE” to select the CD, Bluetooth

audio, iPod, USB

memory mode.

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or

song.

Selecting a folder

Press “MODE” to select the CD (only when MP3/WMA disc is

in use) or USB memory mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting an album

Press “MODE” to select the Bluetooth

audio mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

 To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

STEP

387

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Then hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cel-

lular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

. Bluetooth

is a wireless data sys-

tem that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the

hands-free system and make/receive calls.

 Telephone switch

Volume switch

• Increase the volume

• Decrease the volume

On hook switch

• End call

• Refuse call

Off hook switch

• Sending

• Receiving

• “Telephone” screen dis-

play

388

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Microphone

You can use the microphone

when talking on the phone.

The person you are speaking

to can be heard from the front

speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth

phone in the system. (P. 396)

389

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Status display

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge

on the “Telephone” screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Indicators Conditions

Connection status

Good Not connected

Battery charge

Full Empty

Call area “Rm”: Roaming area

Signal strength

Excellent Poor

390

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When using the hands-free system

 The audio system is muted when making a call.

 If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

 If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

If the Bluetooth

phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound

may deteriorate and connecting condition may go down.

 In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If a window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone

 Conditions under which the system will not operate

 If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth

 If the cellular phone is turned off

 If you are outside service range

 If the cellular phone is not connected

 If the cellular phone’s battery is low

 When outgoing is controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

 When the cellular phone itself cannot be used

 When transferring the phonebook data from the cellular phone

391

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Bluetooth

antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the cellular phone is behind the seat

or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection

status may deteriorate.

 Battery charge/Signal status

 This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.

 This system does not have a charging function.

 The Bluetooth

phone battery will burn quickly when it is connected to

Bluetooth

 When using Bluetooth

audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.

 The Bluetooth

connection may be cut.

 Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth

audio playback.

 About the phonebook in this system

The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another

phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

 Phonebook data

 Call history data

 Speed dial

When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

 When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 321)

392

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 About Bluetooth

 Compatible models

This system supports the following service.

 Bluetooth

Specification:

Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)

 Profiles:

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or

higher)

This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using the cellular phone

or head sets. It has an outgoing and incoming call function.

• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher

This is a profile to exchange phonebook data. When the Bluetooth

phone has PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.

If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth

phone. You need to take OPP or PBAP service individually.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are

owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any

use of such marks by Panasonic Corpo-

ration is under license. Other trademarks

and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

393

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Certification

Declaration of Conformity (DoC)

Hereby, Panasonic Corporation, declares that this Bluetooth Module ASSY

(YEAP01A112) is in compliance with the essential requirements and other

relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

The latest original “DECLARATION of CONFORMITY” (DoC) is available at

the address stated.

[DoC Website address] http://www.ptc.panasonic.de/

(To see the DoC for the product’s component, input the product search num-

ber: YEAP01A112)

394

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not use the cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth

system.

NOTICE

 When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may

become hot, causing damage to the phone.

395

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using the Bluetooth

phone

Device name

Bluetooth

connection status

Make a call

To display the screen shown above, press on the steering

wheel or .

396

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Registering a Bluetooth

phone

To use the hands-free system, you must register a Bluetooth

phone

in the system. You can register up to 5 phones in the system.

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Yes”.

Input the passcode displayed on

the screen into your phone.

For the operation of the phone,

see the manual that comes with

your cellular phone.

Passcodes are not required for

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)

compatible Bluetooth

devices.

Depending on the phone, you

may need to select “Yes” to regis-

ter, or “No” to cancel on your cel-

lular phone.

If you want to cancel it, select

“Cancel”.

If a completion message is dis-

played, registration is complete.

If an error message is displayed,

follow the guidance on the screen

to try again.

STEP

397

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting the Bluetooth

phone

If multiple Bluetooth

devices are registered, follow the procedure

below to select the Bluetooth

device to be used. You may only use

one device at a time.

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Connect telephone”.

Touch the device to connect.

“Add new”: Registering a

Bluetooth

device. (P. 429)

The selection indicator is

displayed on left side of the

selected device name.

The Bluetooth

mark is displayed

when you connected the device.

STEP

398

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Connecting a Bluetooth

phone

There are two connecting methods available-automatic and manual.

Automatic

When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated.

Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth

phone in a place

where connection can be established.

When the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the

system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.

Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the

phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is dis-

played.

399

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Manual

When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth

* power” is turned

off, you must connect Bluetooth

manually.

Display the “Telephone” screen

. (P. 395)

Touch “Connect telephone”.

Touch the device to connect.

A message is shown if connection

has been successful.

If connection fails, a message will

be displayed and connection will

be re-attempted.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

400

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Making a call

Once the Bluetooth

phone is registered, you can make a call using

the following procedure:

 Dialing

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Input the phone number.

To delete the inputted phone

number, touch

For the first digit, you can enter

“+” by touching “

” for a while.

Press on the steering wheel or touch .

 Reconnecting to the Bluetooth

phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine

switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will automatically attempt to

reconnect.

If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this

case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.

 Connecting the phone while Bluetooth

audio is playing

 Bluetooth

audio will stop temporarily.

 It may take time to connect.

STEP

401

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Dialing from the phonebook

You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from

your mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each tele-

phone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook.

(P. 414)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired data to call

from the list.

If the phonebook is empty, a mes-

sage will be displayed. (P. 402)

Choose the number and then

press on the steering wheel

or touch .

STEP

402

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When the phonebook is empty

You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth

phone to

the system.

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP

incompatible Bluetooth

phones. If your cellular phone does not

support either PBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfer contacts.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

If the phonebook is empty, a

message will be displayed.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phone

Touch “Yes” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellu-

lar phone.

Touch “No” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the cellular

phone model.

For PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth

phone

Touch “Transfer” if you want to transfer new contacts from a

cellular phone.

Touch “Cancel” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.

You need to operate your phone to transfer new contacts.

STEP

403

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Calling using speed dial

You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone-

book.

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Speed dials” on the “Telephone” screen.

Select the desired tab and

choose the desired number to

make a call.

STEP

404

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Dialing from history

You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.

“All”: all the calls below which were memorized

“Missed”: calls which you missed

“Incoming”: calls which you received

“Outgoing”: calls which you called

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Call history” on the “Telephone” screen.

Select the desired tab and

choose the desired data from the

list.

Press on the steering wheel

or touch .

STEP

405

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Call history list

 If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the

phonebook, the name is displayed in the call history.

 If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is

displayed in the call history.

 International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile

phone in use.

 Calling by using the latest call history item

Press on the steering wheel to display the “Telephone” screen.

Press on the steering wheel to display the “Call history” screen.

Press on the steering wheel to select the latest history item.

Press on the steering wheel or touch to call the latest his-

tory item.

STEP

406

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together

with a sound.

To answer the phone:

• Press on the steering

wheel.

•Touch .

 To refuse a call

Press on the steering wheel or touch .

 To adjust the incoming call volume

Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering

switches or volume knob.

 International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on

the cellular phone in use.

407

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

 To adjust the incoming call volume

Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering

switches or the volume knob.

 To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Touch “Mute”.

408

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Inputting tones

When using phone services such as an answering service or a

bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the

phonebook.

Touch “0-9”.

Input the number.

If repeated tone symbols* are

stored in the phone book, “Send”

and “Exit” are displayed on the

right side of the screen.

*: Repeated tone symbols are sym-

bols or numbers displayed as p or

w, that come after the phone

number. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1

)

Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and touch

“Send”.

If you touch “Exit”, this function will end.

STEP

409

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 To transfer a call

Touch “Handset Mode” to change from Hands-free call to cellular

phone call.

Touch “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone call to

Hands-free call.

 To hang up

Press on the steering wheel or touch .

 Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incom-

ing call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

• Press on the steering

wheel.

•Touch .

To refuse the call:

• Press on the steering

wheel.

•Touch .

Every time you press on the steering wheel or touch

during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

410

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Transferring calls

 It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while

driving.

 If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free

screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the

screen.

 Transfer method and operate may vary according to the cellular phone

used.

 For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.

 Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and

cellular phone.

411

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Setting the hands-free system

You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.

Setting the sound

Phonebook settings

To display the screen shown above, press “SETUP”, and touch

“Telephone” on the “Setup” screen.

412

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Setting the sound

Display the “Telephone settings” screen. (P. 4 11)

Touch “Sound settings” on the “Telephone settings” screen.

Changes the speaker volume

(P. 412)

Changes the ring tone volume

(P. 412)

Changes the ring tone

(P. 413)

Restore default settings

 Setting the volume

Touch “Call volume” or “Ring tone volume” on the “Sound

settings” screen.

Touch “-” or “+” to lower or raise

the volume, and then “OK”.

When you complete all settings, touch “OK”.

STEP

413

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Setting the ring tone

Touch “Ring tone” on the “Sound settings” screen.

Touch “Tone 1”, “Tone 2” or

“Tone 3” to change the ring tone,

and then “OK”.

When you complete all settings, touch “OK”.

STEP

 To return to the default volume settings

Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.

STEP

414

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Phonebook settings

The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phones in total. The data

for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in

each phonebook.

Managing the contacts

Managing the speed dials

Deleting the call history

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.

Display the “Telephone settings” screen. (P. 4 11)

Touch “Phonebook” on the “Telephone settings” screen.

STEP

415

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Managing the contacts

 Transferring a phone number

You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth



phone to the

system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and

PBAP incompatible Bluetooth



phones. If your cellular phone does

not support either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer con-

tacts.

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 411)

Touch “Manage contacts” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

Touch “Transfer contacts”.

STEP

416

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones

Automatic phonebook down-

load on/off

The phonebook data can be auto-

matically transferred.

Depending on the cellular phone,

call history will be also trans-

ferred.

Update phonebook

The phonebook data can be

updated.

Restore default settings

For PBAP incompatible Bluetooth

phones

Replace contacts

The phonebook data can be

replaced.

Add contacts

The phonebook can be added.

STEP

417

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Deleting the phonebook data

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 414)

Touch “Manage contacts” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

Touch “Delete contacts”.

If your phone supports PBAP ser-

vice, “Automatic phonebook

download” setting needs to be set

to “Off”. (P. 415)

Choose the data to delete.

To delete all data, touch “All

delete”.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is cor-

rect, touch “Yes”.

STEP

418

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Phonebook data

Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another

phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

 Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts”

screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

Touch “Manage contacts” on the “Phonebook settings” screen.

 When transferring a phone number

Transfer the phone number while engine is running.

If your cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input

“1234” by your cellular phone for OBEX certification.

 When you have selected “Update phonebook” to transfer the phone

number

 If your cellular phone does not support PBAP service, you cannot use

this function.

 If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook

data without operating your phone.

 When you have selected “Replace contacts” or “Add contacts” to

transfer the phone number

If your cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these

functions. You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your

phone.

STEP

419

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Transferring the phone number in a different way (To display the

“Contact transfer method” screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.

 Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth



audio is playing

Bluetooth



audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data

transfer finishes. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are

using.

 Deleting the phonebook data in a different way

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Touch “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Touch “Delete” on the “Contact data” screen.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,

touch “Yes”.

If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatic phonebook download” set-

ting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 415)

When you delete a Bluetooth



phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at

the same time.

STEP

420

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Managing the speed dials

 Registering the speed dial from contacts

You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to

18 numbers per phone can be registered.

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 414)

Touch “Manage speed dials” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

Touch “New speed dial from

contacts”.

STEP

421

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Choose the data to register.

Touch the desired phone num-

ber.

Touch the switch you want to

If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation

message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, touch

“Yes”.

STEP

422

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Registering the speed dial from call history

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 414)

Touch “Manage speed dials” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

Touch “New speed dial from call

History”.

Choose the data to register.

STEP

423

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Touch the switch you want to

If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation

message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, touch

“Yes”.

 Deleting the speed dial

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 414)

Touch “Manage speed dials” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

Touch “Delete speed dials” on the “Speed dials” screen.

Choose the data to delete.

To delete all data, touch “All

delete”.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is cor-

rect, touch “Yes”.

STEP

424

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Speed dial” screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Speed dials” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “Options” on the “Speed dial” screen.

 Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Contacts” screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

Touch “Manage speed dials” on the “Phonebook settings” screen.

 Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed dial”

screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Speed dials” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “(add new)” on the “Speed dial” screen.

Touch “Contacts” or “History” to set new speed dial.

Touch “Cancel” to cancel it.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Touch the desired phone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from

“STEP6” (P. 420) or “Registering the speed dial from call history”

from “STEP5”. (P. 422)

STEP

425

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact” screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Contacts” on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Touch “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Touch “Set speed dial” on the “Contact data” screen.

Touch the desired telephone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from

“STEP6” (P. 420) or “Registering the speed dial from call history”

from “STEP5”. (P. 422)

 Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Call history”

screen)

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Call history” on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Touch “Add speed dial” on the “Call history” screen.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from

“STEP6” (P. 420) or “Registering the speed dial from call history”

from “STEP5”. (P. 422)

STEP

426

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Deleting the call history

Display the “Phonebook settings” screen. (P. 414)

Touch “Delete call history” on the “Phonebook settings”

screen.

If your phone supports PBAP service, the “Automatic phonebook

download” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 415)

Choose the desired history to

delete.

Choose the data to delete.

To delete all data, touch “All

delete”.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is cor-

rect, touch “Yes”.

STEP

427

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Deleting call history in a different way

Display the “Telephone” screen. (P. 395)

Touch “Call history” on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch “Delete” on the “Call history” screen.

Follow the steps “Deleting the call history” from “STEP4”. (P. 426)

STEP

428

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Bluetooth

settings

You can set the Bluetooth

system to your desired settings.

Registered devices settings

Connecting telephone

Connecting audio player

Detailed Bluetooth



settings

To display the screen shown above, press “SETUP”, and touch

“Bluetooth

*” on the “Setup” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

429

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Registered devices settings

 Registering a Bluetooth

device

Bluetooth

devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable audio

players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up

to 5 Bluetooth

devices.

Display the “Bluetooth

* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Registered devices” on the “Bluetooth

* Settings”

screen.

Touch “Add new”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

430

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

When this screen is displayed,

input the passcode displayed on

the screen into your Bluetooth



device.

For the operation of the

Bluetooth

device, see the

manual that comes with your

Bluetooth

device.

Passcodes are not required for

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)

compatible Bluetooth

devices.

Depending on the phone, you

may need to select “Yes” to

cellular phone.

If you want to cancel it, touch

“Cancel”.

If a completion message is

displayed, registration is

complete.

If an error message is displayed,

follow the guidance on the screen

to try again.

STEP

431

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Removing a Bluetooth

device

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Registered devices” on the “Bluetooth

* Settings”

screen.

Touch “Remove”.

Touch the device to remove.

A confirmation message will be displayed, touch “Yes” to

remove the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

432

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Displaying a Bluetooth

device details

You can confirm and change the device details.

Display the “Bluetooth

* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Registered devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”

screen.

Touch “Details”.

Touch the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

433

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Following screen is displayed:

Display device name

Display device address

Display your telephone num-

ber

The number may not be dis-

played depending on the

phones.

Display compatibility profile of

the device

Change connection method

(P. 433)

Restore default settings

When you complete settings, touch “OK”.

 Changing connection method

Touch “Connection method” on the “Device details” screen.

Touch “From vehicle” or “From

audio player”.

“From vehicle”: Connect the

audio system to the portable

audio player.

“From audio player”: Connect the

portable audio player to the audio

system.

STEP

434

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting the Bluetooth

phone

If multiple Bluetooth

devices are registered, follow the procedure

below to select the Bluetooth

device to be used. You may only use

one device at a time.

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Connect telephone” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”

screen.

Touch the device to connect.

“Add new”: Registering a

Bluetooth

device. (P. 429)

The selection indicator is

displayed on left side of the

selected device name.

The Bluetooth

mark is displayed

when you connected the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

435

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Selecting the audio player

If multiple Bluetooth

devices are registered, follow the procedure

below to select the Bluetooth

device to be used. You may only use

one device at a time.

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Connect audio player” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”

screen.

Touch the device to connect.

“Add new”: Registering a

Bluetooth

device. (P. 429)

The selection indicator is

displayed on left side of the

selected device name.

The Bluetooth

mark is displayed

when you connected the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Detailed Bluetooth

settings

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth

settings.

Display the “Bluetooth

* Settings” screen. (P. 428)

Touch “Detailed Bluetooth

* settings” on the “Bluetooth*

Settings” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

436

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Following screen is displayed:

Change Bluetooth



power on/

off

You can change Bluetooth



func-

tion to “On” or “Off”

Display device name

Change passcode (P. 437)

Display device address

Display compatibility profile of

the system

Change displaying telephone

status on/off

You can set the system to show

the status confirmation display

when connecting telephone

Change displaying audio

player status on/off

You can set the system to show

the status confirmation display

when connecting audio player

Restore default settings

When you complete settings, touch “OK”.

STEP

437

3-3. Using the “touch screen”

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Editing the passcode

You can change the passcode that you use to register your

Bluetooth



device in the system.

Touch “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

* settings”

screen.

Input a passcode, and touch

“OK”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

STEP

438

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior light (P. 439)

Personal lights (if equipped) (P. 439)

Engine switch light (if equipped)

439

3-4. Using the interior lights

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Personal lights (if equipped)

Turns the lights on/off

Interior light

Turns the light on

Turns the light off

Turns the door position on

 Illuminated entry system (if equipped)

Type A

The lights turn on/off automatically with the opening/closing of the doors.

Type B

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,

whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/

closed.

Personal lights and interior light

440

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Bottle holder (if equipped)

Console box (if equipped)

Cup holders (if equipped)

Auxiliary box (if equipped)

Glove box

441

3-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this

may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

 Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items.

 Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

442

3-5. Using the storage features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Glove box

The glove box can be opened by pulling the lever, locked and

unlocked by using the master key.

Open

Lock

Unlock

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-

ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open

glove box or the items stored inside.

Glove box

443

3-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Console box (if equipped)

Lift the lid while pulling up the

knob to release the lock.

CAUTION

 Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden

swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the

open console box or the items stored inside.

Console box

444

3-5. Using the storage features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Cup holders

Type A (instrument panel)

Pull out the cup holder com-

pletely.

Lift the tray up before returning.

Type B (console box) (if equipped)

Type C (console box) (if equipped)

Cup holders

445

3-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Type D (rear console box) (if equipped)

Pull the lid.

CAUTION

 Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or an accident, cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to

prevent burns.

 When not in use (type A and D)

Keep the cup holders closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden

swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the

open cup holders or the items stored inside.

Cup holders

446

3-5. Using the storage features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Bottle holders

For front seats

For rear seats (if equipped)

 When using the holder as a bottle holder

 When storing a bottle, close the cap.

 The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

NOTICE

 Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups

containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders

447

3-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Auxiliary boxes

Type A (if equipped)

Press in the lid.

The auxiliary box is useful for

temporarily storing sunglasses

and similar small items.

Type B (if equipped)

Type C (if equipped)

Auxiliary boxes

448

3-5. Using the storage features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Caution while driving (type A)

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden

swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an

open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.

 Items unsuitable for storing (type A)

Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall

out, resulting in an accident.

Auxiliary boxes

449

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

3-6. Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the for-

ward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side

position, flip down, unhook,

and swing it to the side.

450

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vanity mirror



: If equipped

Open the cover to use.

451

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Clock

 The clock is displayed when

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

 When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

Vehicles without multi-information display

Adjusts the hours

Adjusts the minutes

Rounds to the nearest

hour

: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00

1:30 to 1:59  2:00

Vehicles with multi-information display

Adjusts the hours

Adjusts the minutes

Rounds to the nearest

hour

: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00

1:30 to 1:59  2:00

452

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Ashtray

CAUTION

 When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-

ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open

ashtray or ash flying out.

 To prevent fire

 Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,

then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

 Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

Pull the lid.

To remove the ashtray, press

down on the lock spring plate

and pull the lid.

453

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Cigarette lighter

 The cigarette lighter can be used when

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

CAUTION

 To avoid burns or fires

 Do not touch the metal part of the cigarette lighter.

 Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

 Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter provided into the cig-

arette lighter outlet. Doing so may deform the outlet and make the ciga-

rette lighter pop out of the outlet or become difficult to take out.

Push the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter will pop up

when it is ready for use.

454

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Power outlet



: If equipped

 The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

 To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-

cuit.

 To prevent blown fuse

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V 10A.

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not

running.

The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on less

than 10A.

Open the cover.

455

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Seat heaters



: If equipped

 The seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

 When not in use

Turn the seat heater off.

Turns on the front left seat

heater

Turns on the front right seat

heater

The indicator light comes on.

456

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Burns

 Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-

lenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

 Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

 Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause

minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

 To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do

not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

 To prevent battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.

457

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place

onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eye-

lets.

Turn the upper knob of each

retaining hook (clip) to secure

the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the

illustration.

STEP

458

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering

with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

 When installing the driver’s floor mat

 Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

 Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

 Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

 Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

 Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

 Before driving

 Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the

provided retaining hooks (clips). Be

especially careful to perform this check

after cleaning the floor.

 With the engine stopped and the shift

lever in P (automatic transmission) or N

(manual transmission), fully depress

each pedal to the floor to make sure it

does not interfere with the floor mat.

459

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Compass



: If equipped

The compass on the multi-information display indicates the direction

in which the vehicle is heading.

 Operation

To turn the compass on, press

the “INFO.” or “DISP” button

until the compass appears.

(P. 185)

“INFO.” button

Direction display

“H” button

“M” button

“RESET” button

“DISP” button (if equipped)

 Displays and directions

Display Direction

N North

NE Northeast

E East

SE Southeast

S South

SW Southwest

W West

NW Northwest

460

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by

the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending

on the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the

compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibra-

tion”.

461

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Deviation calibration

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “INFO.” or

“DISP” button until a number (1

to 15) appears on the clock.

Then press the “H” or “M” button,

and referring to the map above,

select the number of the zone

where you are.

Press the “INFO.” or “DISP” button.

If the direction is displayed for several seconds after adjustment, the

calibration is complete.

STEP

462

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Circling calibration

If the direction display on the

compass flashes, circling calibra-

tion needs to be performed.

Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Press and hold the “INFO.” or

“DISP” button until a number (1

to 15) appears on the clock, and

press the “RESET” button.

“- N -” appears on the direction

display.

Drive the vehicle at 8 km/h (5

mph) or less in a circle until a

direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to

drive in a circle, drive around the

block until a direction is dis-

played.

STEP

463

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

 The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

 The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

 The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to

interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking

lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near

an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

 The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the multi-information display.)

 The battery has been disconnected.

 A door is open.

464

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

 When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.

Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

 To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the multi-information dis-

play.

Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

 To ensure normal operation of the compass

 Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

 During calibration, do not operate electric systems (power windows etc.)

as they may interfere with the calibration.

465

3-6. Other interior features

Interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Deck hooks



: If equipped

CAUTION

 When the deck hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the deck hooks to their stowed positions.

Raise the hooks when

needed.

The deck hooks are provided

for securing loose items.

466

3-6. Other interior features

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Maintenance and care

467

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ......... 466

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior .......... 470

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements................... 474

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions..................... 478

Hood ................................. 482

Engine compartment......... 484

Tires.................................. 501

Tire inflation pressure ....... 505

Wheels.............................. 507

Air conditioning filter ......... 509

Wireless remote control

battery............................. 511

Checking and replacing

fuses............................... 514

Light bulbs ........................ 530

468

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

 Automatic car washes

 Fold the mirrors and remove (vehicles with short pole type antenna) or

retract (vehicles with pillar type antenna) the antenna before washing the

vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install

the antenna (vehicles with short pole type antenna) and extend the mir-

rors before driving.

 Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicle’s paint.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition:

 Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle

body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any

dirt and dust.

 Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

 For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-

oughly with water.

 Wipe away any water.

 Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle

body is cool.

469

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 High pressure car washes

 Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity

of the windows.

 Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle

is closed properly.

 Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

 Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use

hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical

cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

 Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after

driving for long distance in the hot weather.

 Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

 Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

 When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may

cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

 Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled

sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

470

4-1. Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels etc.)

 Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the

paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

 If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

 To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the wheels.

 Cleaning the exterior lights

 Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

 Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

471

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Antenna installation and removal precautions (vehicles with short pole

type antenna)

 Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.

 When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car

wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,

before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.

472

4-1. Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and

keep it in top condition:

 Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

 Cleaning the leather areas

 Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

 Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened

with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-

gent.

 Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

 Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-

ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and venti-

lated area.

 Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

 Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

 Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a

sponge or soft cloth.

 Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the

dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

473

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year

to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

 Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use

water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by

keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

 Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

 Water in the vehicle

 Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch

fire.

 Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 110)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

 Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off

the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

474

4-1. Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Cleaning detergents

 Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-

cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,

alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

 Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other

interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

 Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces:

 Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

 Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

 Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats

up significantly.

 Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes

into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or

under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

475

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Cleaning the inside of the rear window (vehicles with rear window

defogger)

 Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause

damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened

with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in

strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

 Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

476

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance are essential. Toyota recommends performing the fol-

lowing maintenance:

 Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals

according to the maintenance schedule.

For full details of your maintenance schedule, refer to the “Toyota Ser-

vice Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.

 Do-it-yourself maintenance

What about do-it-yourself maintenance?

Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little

mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools

and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if

you’re an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that

repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer will keep a record of

maintenance, which could be useful should you ever require Warranty

Service. Should you choose to select a qualified and equipped profes-

sional other than an authorized Toyota repairer to service or maintain

your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of mainte-

nance be kept.

477

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Where to go for service?

In order to maintain your vehicle in the best possible condition, Toyota rec-

ommends that all repairs and service operations be carried out by autho-

rized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly qualified and equipped

professionals. For repairs and services covered by your warranty, please

visit an authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will use genuine Toyota

parts in repairing any difficulties you may encounter. There can also be

advantages in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repairers for non-war-

ranty repairs and services, as members of the Toyota network will be able to

expertly assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.

Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional will perform all of the scheduled maintenance on your vehicle reli-

ably and economically due to their experience with Toyota vehicles.

478

4-2. Maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Does your vehicle need repairs?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs

that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

 Engine missing, stumbling or pinging

 Appreciable loss of power

 Strange engine noises

 A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-

tioning system after use is normal.)

 Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon mon-

oxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system

checked immediately.)

 Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear

 Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road

 Strange noises related to suspension movement

 Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal or clutch pedal,

pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking

 Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as

soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

479

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

 Handling of the battery

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after

handling. (P. 496)

480

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct

procedure as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 496)

•Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• Distilled water

Engine coolant level (P. 493)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or a similar high quality ethylene

glycol-based non-silicate, non-

amine, non-nitrite and non-borate

coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology

“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-

ant” is pre-mixed with 50% cool-

ant and 50% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding cool-

ant)

Engine oil level (P. 488)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or

equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding

engine oil)

481

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Items Parts and tools

Fuses (P. 516)

• Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

Light bulbs (P. 532)

• Bulb with same number and watt-

age rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Wrench

Radiator, condenser and

intercooler

(P. 495)



Tire inflation pressure (P. 507)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 500)

• Water or washer fluid containing

antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding

water or washer fluid)

482

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may

move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death

or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

 When working on the engine compartment

 Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine

drive belt.

 Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

 Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the

engine compartment.

 Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-

tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

 Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

 Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the

affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.

 Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from

getting in your eyes.

483

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear

due to dirt in the air.

 If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

484

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood lock release

lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the auxiliary catch

lever and lift the hood.

Hold the hood open by insert-

ing the supporting rod into the

slot.

STEP

485

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion

and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

 After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your

head or body.

NOTICE

 When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing

the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.

486

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Engine compartment

Left-hand drive vehicles

Battery (if equipped)

(P. 496)

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 493)

Intercooler (P. 495)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 490)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 488)

Fuel filter (P. 502, 595)

Fuse box (P. 516)

Battery (P. 496)

Washer fluid tank (P. 500)

Condenser (P. 495)

Radiator (P. 495)

487

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Right-hand drive vehicles

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 493)

Intercooler (P. 495)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 490)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 488)

Fuel filter (P. 502, 595)

Battery (if equipped)

(P. 496)

Fuse box (P. 516)

Battery (P. 496)

Washer fluid tank (P. 500)

Condenser (P. 495)

Radiator (P. 495)

488

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil

level on the dipstick.

 Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,

wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bot-

tom of the engine.

Remove the sand and dust from around the dipstick.

Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Make sure that the inlet of the oil level gauge guide and O-ring of the

dipstick are free from sand and dust.

If the O-ring is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check

the oil level.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

STEP

489

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Low

Full

490

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as that

already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before

adding oil.

Remove the sand and dust from around the oil filler cap.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil selection P. 610, 612

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

For Russia and Ukraine

1.6 L (1.7 qt., 1.4 Imp.qt.)

Except for Russia and Ukraine

1.4 L (1.5 qt., 1.2 Imp.qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP

491

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Engine oil consumption

 The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the

quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

 More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and

frequent acceleration and deceleration.

 A new engine consumes more oil.

 When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil

may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-

rately.

 Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L/1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./

600 miles)

 If your vehicle consumes more than 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp.qt.) every

1000 km (600 miles), contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 After changing the engine oil

The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following pro-

cedures:

Switch the display to the trip meter A (P. 178) when the engine is

in the “ON” position.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

While pressing the odometer/trip meter display change button

(P.178), turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (do not start

the engine because reset mode will be canceled). Continue to

press and hold the button for more than one second after the trip

meter displays “000000”.

STEP

492

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Used engine oil

 Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used

engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

 Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do

not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the

ground. Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for

information concerning recycling or disposal.

 Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

 To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

 When replacing the engine oil

 Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

 Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

 Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

 Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

493

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the upper and lower

lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

Upper line

Lower line

If the level is on or below the

lower line, add coolant up to the

upper line. (P. 592)

 Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant

with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%

deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -35C [-31F])

For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock

and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, test the cap and check for

leaks in the cooling system.

494

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the

cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

 When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of

water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

 If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

 Notice on coolant quality

Do not use improper coolant. If improper coolant is used, the engine cooling

system may be damaged.

495

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Radiator, condenser and intercooler

Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear away any

foreign objects.

If any of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their

condition, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

CAUTION

 When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler as they may be hot and

cause serious injuries, such as burns.

496

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

 Caution symbols

The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are as

follows:

 Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

No smoking, no

naked flames, no

sparks

Battery acid

Shield eyes

Note operating

instructions

Keep away from chil-

dren

Explosive gas

497

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Checking battery fluid

Check that the level is between

the upper and lower lines.

Upper line

Lower line

If the fluid level is at or below the

lower line, add distilled water.

 Adding distilled water

Remove the vent plug.

Add distilled water.

If the upper line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking

directly at the cell.

Put the vent plug back on and close it securely.

Low O.K.

STEP

498

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

 If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

 Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

CAUTION

 Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the

battery:

 Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

 Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

 Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

 Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

 Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

 Keep children away from the battery.

 Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

499

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

 If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

 If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

 If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-

ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

 If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia,

beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immedi-

ately.

NOTICE

 When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

 When adding distilled water

Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-

sion.

500

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Washer fluid

Vehicles without washer fluid level gauge

If any washer does not work, the

washer tank may be empty. Add

washer fluid.

Vehicles with washer fluid level gauge

If the washer fluid level is at

“LOW”, add washer fluid.

501

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Using the gauge (if equipped)

CAUTION

 When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid

contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

 Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

 Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-

tle.

The washer fluid level can be checked by

observing the position of the level on the

liquid-covered holes in the gauge.

If the level falls below the second hole

from the bottom (the “LOW” position),

refill the washer fluid.

Current

fluid level

502

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel filter

You may drain the fuel filter yourself. However, as the operation is dif-

ficult, we recommend having it drained by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Even if you decide to drain it yourself, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

The water in the fuel filter needs to be drained if the fuel system

warning light flashes. (P. 560)

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

Place a small tray under the drain plug or drain hose to catch

the water and any fuel that comes out.

Turn the drain plug counter-

clockwise about 2 to 2 1/2

turns.

Operate the priming pump

until fuel begins to run out.

After draining, tighten the drain plug by hand.

STEP

503

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules

and treadwear.

 Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indi-

cators is shown by the “TWI” or

“” marks, etc., molded on the

sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and

pressure if not rotated.

 Tire rotation

Vehicles with spare tire of a different wheel type from the

installed tires

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that tire rotation is car-

ried out approximately every

10000 km (6000 miles).

Front

504

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

 You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

 A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size

or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Vehicles with spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed

tires

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that tire rotation is car-

ried out approximately every

10000 km (6000 miles).

Front

505

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it

has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

 If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

CAUTION

 When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dan-

gerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

 Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

 Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

 Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

 Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

 Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

506

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the

cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause

damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

 If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

507

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Tire inflation pressure

 Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

 Reduced fuel efficiency

 Reduced driving comfort and tire life

 Reduced safety

 Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

 Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been

driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire

inflation pressure reading.

 Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation

pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and

handling.

 Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire infla-

tion pressure to be higher after driving.

 Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is

balanced.

Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation

pressure should be checked at least once per month. However,

Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once

every two weeks. (P. 620)

508

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may

occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:

 Excessive wear

 Uneven wear

 Poor handling

 Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

 Poor sealing of the tire bead

 Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

 A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

 When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause

air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace

them as soon as possible.

509

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of

handling control.

 Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,

rim width and inset

Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

 Wheels of different sizes or types

 Used wheels

 Bent wheels that have been straightened

 Aluminum wheel precautions

 Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use

with your aluminum wheels.

 When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

 Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

 Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a

plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

510

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When replacing wheels

 Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

 Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-

less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious

injury.

 When installing the wheel nuts

 Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,

leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-

dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease

from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

 Be sure to install the wheel nuts with

the tapered end facing inward. Install-

ing the nuts with the tapered end facing

outward can cause wheel to break and

eventually cause a wheel to come off

while driving, which could lead to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

Tapered

portion

511

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air

conditioning efficiency.

 Removal method

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box.

Push in each side of the glove

box to disconnect the claws.

Remove the filter cover.

STEP

512

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement

may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to

the “Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)

 If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

 When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the

system.

Remove the filter and replace

it with a new one.

The “UP” marks shown on

the filter should be pointing up.

STEP

513

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Wireless remote control battery



: If equipped

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

 You will need the following items:

 Flathead screwdriver

 Lithium battery CR2016

 Replacing the battery

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Remove the module.

STEP

514

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Use a CR2016 lithium battery

 Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appli-

ance shops or camera stores.

 Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer.

 Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

 If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

 The wireless remote control will not function properly.

 The operational range will be reduced.

Remove the battery cover and

the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

STEP

515

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,

they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious

injury.

 Certification for the key battery

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUC-

TIONS.

NOTICE

 For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

 Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

 Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

 Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

516

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid

off.

Driver’s side instrument panel for left-hand drive vehicles

(front and rear sides)

Remove the lower instrument

panel.

Rear side: Inspection and

replacement of the fuses, con-

tact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

STEP

517

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Driver’s side instrument panel for right-hand drive vehicles

(front and rear sides)

Remove the lower instrument

panel.

Rear side: Inspection and

replacement of the fuses, con-

tact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

518

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Passenger’s side instrument panel for left-hand drive vehicles

Open the glove box. Push in

each side of the glove box to

disconnect the claws.

519

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Passenger’s side instrument panel for right-hand drive vehi-

cles

Open the glove box. Push in

each side of the glove box to

disconnect the claws.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-

ings” (P. 523) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse.

Type A and B fuses can be

removed using the pullout

tool.

STEP

520

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a

new fuse of an appropriate

amperage rating. The amper-

age rating can be found on the

fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a

new fuse of an appropriate

amperage rating. The amper-

age rating can be found on the

fuse box lid.

STEP

ITY42C012

521

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a

new fuse of an appropriate

amperage rating. The amper-

age rating can be found on the

fuse box lid.

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

ITY42C014

522

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Type E

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Type F

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

523

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

The provision of fuses and systems connected to the circuit may dif-

fer depending on the model and specification.

Engine compartment

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 SPARE 25 A Spare fuse

2 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse

3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse

4 FOG 15 A Front fog lights

5 HORN 10 A Horn

6 EFI 25 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

7 PTC NO.1 50 A Power heater

524

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

8 PWR SEAT 30 A Power seat

9 PTC NO.2 50 A Power heater

10 H-LP CLN 40 A Headlight cleaners

11 FR HTR 50 A Air conditioning system, A/C fuse

12 ABS NO.2 30 A ABS, TRC and VSC

13 ABS NO.1 40 A ABS, TRC and VSC

14 ALT 100 A

Charging system, PWR SEAT, H-

LP CLN, FR HTR, AM1, IG1, PTC

NO.1, PTC NO.2, PWR OUT,

STOP, TAIL and OBD fuses

15 GLOW 80 A Engine glow system

16 BATT P/I 50 A FOG, HORN and EFI fuses

17 AM2 30 A

Engine starter, ST, IGN, INJ and

MET

18 MAIN 40 A

H-LP RH, H-LP LH, H-LP RL and

H-LP LL fuses

19 H-LP RL 15 A Right-hand headlight (Low)

20 H-LP LL 15 A Left-hand headlight (Low)

21 H-LP RH 15 A

Right-hand headlight (High) and

right-hand headlight (Low)

22 H-LP LH 15 A

Left-hand headlight (High) and left-

hand headlight (Low)

23 EFI No.2 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

525

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

24 ECU-B 10 A

Door courtesy switches, power

door lock system, wireless remote

control system, steering sensor

and headlights

25 RAD 15 A Audio system

26 DOME 7.5 A

Interior lights, engine switch light,

personal light, gauges and meters,

clock, multi-information display,

wireless remote control system,

daytime running light system and

fog light

27 A/F 20 A Emission control system

28 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system

29 TURN-HAZ 15 A

Emergency flashers and turn signal

lights

30 ECU-B No.2 7.5 A Air conditioning system

31 DCC 30 A ECU-B, DOME and RAD fuses

526

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Driver’s side instrument panel (front side)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 PWR OUT 15 A Power outlet

2 TAIL 10 A

Instrument panel light, front fog

lights, headlight beam level control

system, front position lights, tail

lights, license plate lights, multiport

fuel injection system/sequential

multiport fuel injection system,

multi-information display, daytime

running light system and automatic

headlight system

3 STOP 10 A

Stop lights, high mounted stoplight,

multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, ABS, TRC, VSC and shift

lock control system

527

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

4 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system

5 INJ 15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

ECU-IG &

GAUGE

10 A

Air conditioning system, charging

system, rear differential lock sys-

tem, ABS, TRC, VSC, emergency

flashers, turn signal lights, back-up

lights, multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, shift lock control

system, rear window defogger,

headlights, door courtesy switches,

power door lock system, wireless

remote control system, steering

sensor, daytime running light sys-

tem, cruise control, headlight clean-

ers, seat heaters, outside rear view

mirror defoggers, multi-information

display and passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

7 WIP 20 A Windshield wiper and washer

8 IGN 7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, SRS airbags and fuel pump

9 ACC 7.5 A

Audio system, power outlet, clock,

power rear view mirror control sys-

tem, shift lock control system and

multi-information display

528

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

10 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter

11 MET 7.5 A

Gauges and meters and DPF sys-

tem

12 A/C 10 A Air conditioning system

13 ST 7.5 A

Starting system, gauges and

meters and multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system

529

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Driver’s side instrument panel (rear side)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 AM1 40 A

Rear differential lock system, ABS,

TRC, VSC, ACC, CIG, ECU-IG &

GAUGE, and WIP fuses

2 IG1 40 A

PWR, S-HTR, 4WD, DOOR, DEF

and MIR HTR fuses

530

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 MIR-HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

2 4WD 20 A

Rear differential lock system, ABS,

TRC and VSC

3 S-HTR 15 A Seat heaters

4 DEF 20 A

Rear window defogger and multi-

port fuel injection system/sequential

multiport fuel injection system

5 DOOR 25 A

Power door lock system and power

windows

6 PWR 30 A Power windows

ITI43I094

531

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 After a fuse is replaced

 If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (P. 532)

 If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION

 To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or

injury.

 Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use

any other object in place of a fuse.

 Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

 Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

 Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional, as soon as possible.

532

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level

of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger

that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement

is carried out by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 622)

 Front bulb locations

Front fog light*

Front position light

Side turn signal light

(fender-mounted type)

Headlight

Front turn signal light

533

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Replacing light bulbs

 Headlight

Before replacing the bulbs (right side only):

Release the clips of the air

cleaner filter cover, and remove

the cover to allow easy access to

the light bulbs.

 Rear bulb locations

*: If equipped

Rear fog light

(right-hand drive vehicles)

or back-up light

Stop/tail lights

Rear turn signal light

License plate

lights

Rear fog light

(left-hand drive vehicles)

or back-up light

STEP

534

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Unplug the connector and

remove the rubber cover.

Release the bulb retaining

spring.

Remove the bulb.

To install a new bulb, align the

tabs of the bulb with the cutouts

of the mounting hole.

STEP

535

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Front fog lights (if equipped)

To allow enough working space,

turn the steering wheel to the

opposite side of the bulb to be

replaced.

Remove the bolts and clip.

Removing the clip

Installing the clip

STEP

536

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Partly remove the fender liner

and unplug the connector while

pressing the lock release.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

STEP

Bumper

Fender

liner

STEP

537

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Front position lights

To allow enough working space,

turn the steering wheel to the

opposite side of the bulb to be

replaced.

Remove the bolts and clip.

Removing the clip

Installing the clip

STEP

538

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Partly remove the fender liner

and turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP

Bumper

Fender

liner

STEP

539

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Front turn signal lights

To allow enough working space,

turn the steering wheel to the

opposite side of the bulb to be

replaced.

Remove the bolts and clip.

Removing the clip

Installing the clip

STEP

540

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Partly remove the fender liner

and turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP

Bumper

Fender

liner

ITO43P144

STEP

541

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Side turn signal lights (fender-mounted type) (if equipped)

Remove the unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP

Front

STEP

542

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Stop/tail lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and rear

fog light

Remove the securing bolts and

remove the unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Stop/tail light

Rear turn signal light

Back-up light or rear fog light

Remove the light bulb.

Stop/tail light

Rear turn signal light

Back-up light or rear fog light

STEP

543

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 License plate lights

Remove the unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP

544

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

 Side turn signal lights (mirror-mounted type) (if equipped)

 High mounted stoplight (if equipped)

 When installing the rubber cover of the headlight

Ensure the rubber cover is securely attached.

 LED light bulbs

The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs

burn out, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.

 Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does

not indicate a malfunction.

 Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

 Water has built up inside the headlight.

Fit the rubber cover outer circumfer-

ence in firmly.

Fit the rubber cover around the light

bulb in until the light bulb plug can be

seen.

545

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Replacing light bulbs

 Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after

turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

 Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the

bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

 Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so

may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This

may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

 To prevent damage or fire

 Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

 Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

546

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

When trouble arises

547

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.......... 546

If your vehicle needs

to be towed..................... 547

If you think something is

wrong.............................. 553

Fuel pump shut off

system ............................ 554

5-2. Steps to take in

an emergency

If a warning light turns

on or a warning

buzzer sounds ................ 555

If you have a flat tire ......... 563

If the engine will not

start................................. 582

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ............ 583

If you lose your keys......... 584

If the vehicle battery is

discharged...................... 585

If your vehicle

overheats........................ 590

If you run out of fuel

and the engine stalls....... 593

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ............................... 594

If your vehicle has

to be stopped in

an emergency................. 596

548

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the

engine is not running.

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is

involved in an accident.

Vehicles without automatic air conditioning system

Press the switch to flash all

the turn signal lights. To turn

them off, press the switch

once again.

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system

Press the switch to flash all

the turn signal lights. To turn

them off, press the switch

once again.

549

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, before towing.

 The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.

 The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, such as or a commercial towing service,

using a lift-type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

550

5-1. Essential information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in

an emergency, your vehicle may

be temporarily towed using a

cable or chain secured to the

emergency towing eyelet(s).

This should only be attempted

on hard surfaced roads for short

distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer and operate the brakes.

The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,

axles, steering and brakes must

be in good condition.

551

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck

to prevent body damage.

552

5-1. Essential information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front

Vehicles with automatic trans-

mission: Use a towing dolly

under the rear wheels.

Vehicles with manual transmis-

sion: We recommend using a

towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

When not using a towing dolly,

release the parking brake and

shift the shift lever to N.

From the rear (Pre Runner)

Turn the engine switch to the

“ACC” position so that the steer-

ing wheel is unlocked.

From the rear (4WD models)

Use a towing dolly under the

front wheels.

553

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Using a flatbed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie

down your vehicle, the angles

shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie

downs or the vehicle may be

damaged.

 Before emergency towing

Release the parking brake.

4WD models: Shift the front drive control lever to H2.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine

running) position.

CAUTION

 Caution while towing

 Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive

stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always

be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

 If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering

will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

STEP

554

5-1. Essential information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and transfer

(4WD models) when towing using a wheel-lift type truck (vehicles with

automatic transmission)

Pre Runner: Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the

ground.

4WD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with

the ground.

 To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type

truck (vehicles with manual transmission)

 Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the

“LOCK” position or the key is removed. The steering lock mechanism is

not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

 When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the

vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

 To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

555

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as

soon as possible.

 Visible symptoms

 Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

 Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

 Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points

higher than normal.

 Audible symptoms

 Changes in exhaust sound

 Excessive tire squeal when cornering

 Strange noises related to the suspension system

 Pinging or other noises related to the engine

 Operational symptoms

 Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

 Appreciable loss of power

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

 Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost

touches the floor

556

5-1. Essential information

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is

activated.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

 Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when

an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system

stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

STEP

557

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle

may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-

tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not

released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is

fully released the system is operating normally.

• Low negative pressure in the vacuum tank

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights

comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes

off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

558

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-

ately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

Warning light Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates:

• Malfunction in the emission control system.

• Malfunction in the electronic engine control system.

• The boost pressure in the turbocharger is abnormally

high.

• Malfunction in DPF system

559

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Warning light Warning light/Details

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system (vehicles with VSC system)

(flashes)

and

VSC OFF and slip indicator lights (if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in:

• Vehicle stability control; or

• Traction control

(flashes)

Four-wheel drive indicator light

Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system

(P. 212)

Cruise control indicator light*

(if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system

(P. 202)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning

light (if equipped)

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid tempera-

ture is too high.

Timing belt replacement warning light

Indicates that the timing belt should be replaced

560

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

: If equipped

: Slow down until the lamp goes off.

: The light turns to yellow (except for Russia and Ukraine) or flashes (for

Russia and Ukraine).

Warning light Warning light/Details

Fuel system warning light

Indicates:

• The amount of accumulated water in the fuel filter has

reached the specified level if the light flashes. (P. 502)

• The fuel filter need to be replaced if the light comes on.

DPF system warning light

Indicates:

• Vehicles without DPF system switch: The amount of

accumulated deposit in the DPF catalytic converter has

reached the specified level if the light comes on. Regen-

erate the filter. (P. 563)

• Vehicles without DPF system switch: Malfunction in the

DPF system if the light flashes.

• Vehicles with DPF system switch: Regenerate the filter

with the DPF system switch if the light turns on or

flashes. (P. 227)

561

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light goes off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light

Indicates that a door is not fully

closed

Check that all the

doors are closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates remaining fuel is

approximately 12.0 L

(3.2 gal., 2.6 Imp.gal.) or less

Refuel the vehicle.

(for driver)

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light (warning buzzer)

Warns the driver to fasten his/

her seat belt

Fasten the seat belt.

(for front

passenger)

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

Warns the front passenger to

fasten his/her seat belt

Fasten the seat belt.

Unengaged “Park” warning

light (if equipped)

The transmission “Park” mech-

anism is not engaged.

Shift front drive con-

trol lever to “H2” or

“H4” or “L4”.

562

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

*: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat

belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 30 seconds after

the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still

unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Low engine oil level warn-

ing light

Indicates that engine oil

level is low

Check the level of engine oil

and add more oil if neces-

sary.

(remains on)

Engine oil change

reminder light

Except for Russia and

Ukraine

Indicates that the engine

oil should be changed

Comes on approximately

30000 km (18000 miles)

after the engine oil has

been changed (and the

oil maintenance date has

been reset)

For Russia and Ukraine

You have forgotten to

reset the oil change sys-

tem

Change the engine oil in

accordance with the

maintenance schedule.

Have the engine oil and oil

filter checked and/or

changed by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional. After

changing the engine oil, the

oil change system should

be reset. (P. 491)

563

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

For some models, the malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank

becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle

immediately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

 Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed with the engine off

and the driver’s door opened.

 If the DPF system warning light comes on

The deposit collected in the filter needs to be regenerated.

To regenerate the filter, the following driving methods are recommended

 By driving continuously (for example, at around 60 km/h [37 mph] for

approximately 20 minutes).

 By avoiding short trips, or by driving continuously (leaving the engine

running for long periods of time).

The DPF warning light will extinguish when regeneration is complete. How-

ever, if this driving cannot be carried out, or if the light does not extinguish

even after driving, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-

diately.

For details of the DPF system. (P. 227)

*: When driving, pay sufficient attention to weather, road conditions, terrain

and traffic conditions, and drive according to traffic laws.

564

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on (vehi-

cles with VSC system)

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the

ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

NOTICE

 If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the boost pressure in

the turbocharger is abnormally high

Never drive at high speed or race the engine even after the lamp goes off.

 If the fuel system warning light flashes

Never drive the vehicle with the warning light flashing. Continued driving with

water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection pump.

565

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.

 Before jacking up the vehicle

 Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

 Set the parking brake.

 Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual

transmission).

 Stop the engine.

 Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 548)

 Location of the spare tire

 Location of the jack and tools

Single-cab models

The jack and tools are stored

behind the seat.

566

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Extra-cab models

The jack and tools are stored

under the lid.

Double-cab models

The jack and tools are stored

under the bottom cushion.

567

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Taking out the jack and tools

Single-cab models

Unhook the strap and take out

the tool bag.

Take out the jack.

For loosening

For tightening

STEP

568

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Extra-cab models

Vehicles with rear seat cushions: Remove the rear seat cush-

ions. (P. 7 2)

Pull the tag and open the lid.

Unhook the strap and take out

the tool bag.

Take out the jack.

For loosening

For tightening

STEP

569

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Double-cab models

Tumbling the bottom cushion (P. 7 3)

Open the lid.

Take out the tool bag.

Take out the jack.

For loosening

For tightening

STEP

570

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Taking out the spare tire

Assembling the jack handle.

Remove the jack handle end, jack handle extensions and

wheel nut wrench from the tool bag and assemble by follow-

ing these steps.

Loosen the bolts using a

screwdriver.

Assemble the jack handle

end, jack handle extensions

and wheel nut wrench and

tighten the bolts.

Check that the bolts are firmly

tightened.

Insert the jack handle extension

into the lowering screw.

Lower

Raise

Place a rag under the jack handle

extension to protect the bumper.

STEP

571

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Lower the spare tire completely

to the ground.

Remove the holding bracket and

pull out the spare tire.

If it is difficult to pull the tire away

from the vehicle, hold the tire

and move it away from the flat

tire, as shown in the illustration.

STEP

572

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

STEP

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front

Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Rear

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

573

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Remove the wheel ornament.

Type A

Pry off the wheel ornament,

using the beveled end of the

wheel nut wrench as shown.

To protect the wheel ornament,

place a rag between the wheel

nut wrench and the wheel orna-

ment.

Type B

Pry off the wheel ornament,

using the beveled end of the

wheel nut wrench as shown.

To protect the wheel ornament,

place a rag between the wheel

nut wrench and the wheel orna-

ment.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

STEP

574

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Assembling the jack handle. (P. 570)

Position the jack at the jack

points as shown.

Front

Under the cross member

Rear

Under the rear axle housing

STEP

575

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

When positioning the jack under

the rear axle housing, make sure

the groove on the top of the jack

fits with the rear axle housing.

If the tire is still underneath the

vehicle, leave the vehicle jacked

up and use a tool to pull the tire

out.

Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

scratching the wheel surface.

STEP

CAUTION

 When take out the spare tire

 Be careful not to touch the exhaust, as you may burn yourself.

 Be careful not to injure yourself by trapping your hands in or becoming

caught in the rear under protection.

576

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat-

ter from the wheel contact sur-

face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is in

motion, causing the tire to come

off.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by

approximately the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel

with a steel wheel, tighten the

wheel nuts until the tapered por-

tion comes into loose contact

with the disc wheel seat.

When replacing an aluminum

wheel with a steel wheel, tighten

the wheel nuts until the tapered

portion comes into loose contact

with the disc wheel seat.

STEP

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

seat

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

seat

577

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

When replacing an aluminum

wheel with an aluminum wheel,

turn the wheel nuts until the

washers come into contact with

the disc wheel.

Lower the vehicle.

Disc wheel

Washer

Wheel nut

STEP

578

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order

shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)

Vehicles with spare tire of the same wheel type as the

installed tires: Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Type A

Type B

STEP

579

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

Lay down the tire with the outer

side facing up, and hook the

holding bracket as shown in the

illustration.

Raise the tire.

After the tire goes half way up,

check that the suspended chain is

able to enter the tire hole, for

proper storage.

Check the tire from the side to

see that the tire is stored horizon-

tally.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

STEP

580

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Certification for the jack

581

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the

jack, leading to death or serious injury.

 Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-

ing and removing tire chains.

 Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

 Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the correct jack up point.

 Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by

the jack.

 Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

 Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

 When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

 Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace

the tire.

 Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working

on or near the vehicle may be injured.

 Do not continue jacking up once the

yellow caution line has appeared.

Yellow

caution line

582

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Using the jack handle

Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver

or your hand, to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpect-

edly.

 Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious

injury:

 Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately

after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the

brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or

other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

 Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from

under the vehicle.

 Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in han-

dling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

 Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 105 N•m

(10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

 Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

 When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

 If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or

bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and

the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

583

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing the wheel nuts

Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered end facing inward.

(

P. 510)

 After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their

storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision

or sudden braking.

NOTICE

 Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

 When stowing the flat tire

Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle under-

body.

 When assembling the jack handle extension

Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise the extension may come off and it

may damage the paint or vehicle body.

584

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures

are being followed (

P. 162), consider each of the following points:

 The engine will not start even though the starter motor

operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

 There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

(P. 595)

 There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(P. 102)

 The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at

a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

 The battery may be discharged. (P. 587)

 The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

 The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and

headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

 One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

 The battery may be discharged. (P. 587)

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, if the problem cannot be

repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

585

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P



: If equipped

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,

there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to pre-

vent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to

ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Press the shift lock override

button.

The shift lever can be shifted

while the button is pressed.

STEP

586

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. Bring

a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.

587

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-

cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by follow-

ing the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro-

cedure:

1KD-FTV engine

STEP

588

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

2KD-FTV engine

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery

terminal on your vehicle.

Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the

positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-

nal on the second vehicle.

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a

solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery

and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

589

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with auto-

matic transmission)

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

 To prevent battery discharge

 Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

 Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

 When the battery is removed or discharged

The power windows must be initialized. (P. 92)

 Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the

vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-

tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may

discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges

automatically during driving.)

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine

speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5

minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start

the engine of your vehicle.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper

cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con-

nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, as soon as possible.

STEP

590

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-

mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

 Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that

it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

 Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact

with each other.

 Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near

the battery.

 Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while

related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-

cautions when handling the battery:

 When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing

or the vehicle body.

 Do not lean over the battery.

 In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention

can be received.

 Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

 Do not allow children near the battery.

 To prevent damage to the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the catalytic converter may overheat

and become a fire hazard.

591

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-

gled in the cooling fan or belt.

592

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-

tioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-

sides and then restart the engine.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the

instrument panel) begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and call any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

After the engine has cooled

down sufficiently, check the

engine coolant level and

inspect the radiator core (radi-

ator) for any leaks.

STEP

593

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:

 The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of

power is experienced.

 Steam comes out from under the hood.

Add engine coolant if neces-

sary.

Water can be used in an emer-

gency if engine coolant is

unavailable. (P. 614)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as

soon as possible.

STEP

594

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle

 If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-

ing serious injuries such as burns.

 Keep hands and clothing away from the fans and drive belt while the

engine is running.

 Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are

hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam

released under pressure.

NOTICE

 When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too

quickly can cause damage to the engine.

595

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls

NOTICE

 When restarting the engine

 Do not crank the engine before refueling and operating the priming pump.

This may damage the engine and fuel system.

 Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may

overheat the starter and wiring system.

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls:

Refuel your vehicle.

To bleed the fuel system,

operate the priming pump until

you feel more resistance.

Start the engine. (P. 162)

If the engine does not start after the above steps have been per-

formed, wait for 10 seconds and try step 2 and 3 again. If the

engine still does not start, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

After starting the engine, depress the accelerator pedal lightly until

the engine runs smoothly.

STEP

596

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If the vehicle becomes stuck

CAUTION

 When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The

vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.

Use extreme caution.

 When shifting the shift lever

For vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift

lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-

sion).

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires

to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Lock the rear differential.

(P. 217)

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic trans-

mission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission) and care-

fully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

For vehicles with VSC system, turn off TRC and VSC if these

functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle.

(P. 222)

STEP

597

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To avoid damage to the transmission and other components

 Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more

than necessary.

 If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,

the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

598

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-

cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly

depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the

effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the

road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as possible.

Stop the engine by turning the

engine switch to the “ACC”

position.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

STEP

599

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If the engine has to be turned off while driving

 Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the

brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

 Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

600

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Vehicle specifications

601

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 600

Fuel information................ 621

6-2. Initialization

Items to initialize ............... 623

602

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions

: Unladen vehicle

: Without rear bumper

: With rear bumper

: Without over fender

: With over fender

: With 205R16C tires

: With 255/70R15C tires

: With 265/65R17 tires

Overall length

5135 mm (202.1 in.)

5260 mm (207.0 in.)*

Overall width

1760 mm (69.3 in.)

1835 mm (72.2 in.)*

Overall

height

Single-cab models

1795 mm (70.7 in.)

6, 7

1805 mm (71.0 in.)*

Extra-cab models

1835 mm (72.2 in.)

Double-cab models

1850 mm (72.8 in.)

6, 7

1860 mm (73.2 in.)*

Wheelbase

3085 mm (121.5 in.)

Front and rear tread

1510 mm (59.4 in.)

1540 mm (60.6 in.)*

7, 8

603

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Weights

Single-cab models

Gross

vehicle mass

4WD

models

Left-hand drive

vehicles

2640 kg (5820 lb.)

Right-hand

drive vehicles

2730 kg (6019 lb.)

Pre Runner

2640 kg (5820 lb.)

Maximum

permissible

axle capacity

Front

1280 kg (2822 lb.)

Rear

1600 kg (3527 lb.)

Drawbar load

115 kg (254 lb.)

Towing

capacity

Without brake

750 kg (1654 lb.)

With brake

2800 kg (6173 lb.)

604

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Extra-cab models

: Models for European countries*

: Models only for Finland*

: Pre Runner

: 4WD models

: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model

your vehicle is. (P. 41)

Gross

vehicle mass

4WD

models

Left-hand drive

vehicles

2620 kg (5776 lb.)*

2705 kg (5964 lb.)*

Right-hand

drive vehicles

3010 kg (6636 lb.)

Pre Runner

2590 kg (5710 lb.)

Maximum

permissible

axle capacity

Front

1280 kg (2822 lb.)

Rear

Left-hand drive

vehicles

1600 kg (3527 lb.)

Right-hand

drive vehicles

1600 kg (3527 lb.)*

1900 kg (4189 lb.)*

Drawbar load

115 kg (254 lb.)

Towing

capacity

Without brake

750 kg (1654 lb.)

With brake

2800 kg (6173 lb.)

605

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Double-cab models

Gross

vehicle

mass

4WD

models

1KD-FTV

engine

Left-hand

drive

vehicles

2720 kg (5967 lb.)

2730 kg (6019 lb.)*

Right-

hand drive

vehicles

3080 kg (6790 lb.)

2KD-FTV

engine

Left-hand

drive

vehicles

2680 kg (5908 lb.)

2690 kg (5930 lb.)*

Right-

hand drive

vehicles

3040 kg (6702 lb.)

Pre Runner

2600 kg (5732 lb.)

Maxi-

mum per-

missible

axle

capacity

1KD-

FTV

engine

Left-hand

drive vehicles

Front 1340 kg (2954 lb.)

Rear 1600 kg (3527 lb.)

Right-hand

drive vehicles

Front 1340 kg (2954 lb.)

Rear 1900 kg (4189 lb.)

2KD-

FTV

engine

Left-hand

drive vehicles

Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)

Rear 1600 kg (3527 lb.)

Right-hand

drive vehicles

Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)

Rear

1600 kg (3527 lb.)

1900 kg (4189 lb.)*

Drawbar load

115 kg (254 lb.)

Towing

capacity

Without brake

750 kg (1654 lb.)

With brake

2790 kg (6151 lb.)

2800 kg (6173 lb.)*

606

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

: For Norway

: Except for Norway

: Pre Runner

: 4WD models

: KUN26L-PRMDYW and KUN26L-PRADYW models*

: Except KUN26L-PRMDYW and KUN26L-PRADYW models*

: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.

(P. 606)

Vehicle identification

 Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for

your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the

rear right frame.

This number is also on the man-

ufacture’s label or plate.

607

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

608

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Engine

1KD-FTV engine

2KD-FTV engine

Model 1KD-FTV

Type

4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel (with turbo-

charger)

Bore and stroke 96.0  103.0 mm (3.78  4.06 in.)

Displacement 2982 cm

(182.0 cu.in.)

Valve clearance

(engine cold)

Intake: 0.20  0.30 mm (0.008  0.012 in.)

Exhaust: 0.35  0.45 mm (0.014  0.018 in.)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Model 2KD-FTV

Type

4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel (with turbo-

charger)

Bore and stroke 92.0  93.8 mm (3.62  3.69 in.)

Displacement 2494 cm

(152.2 cu.in.)

Valve clearance

(engine cold)

Intake: 0.20  0.30 mm (0.008  0.012 in.)

Exhaust: 0.35  0.45 mm (0.014  0.018 in.)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

609

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel

Fuel type

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European standard

EN590

Except EU area (expect Russia):

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sul-

fur

Except EU area (Russia):

Diesel fuel confirming to GOST R52368-2005

(Sulfur max 50 ppm).

Cetane number 48 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)

610

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Lubrication system (except for Russia and Ukraine)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing

the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,

and check the oil level on the dipstick.

 Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota

recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.

Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil grade: ACEA C2

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill

reference

With filter

Without filter

6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)

6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)

NOTICE

Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.

611

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-30 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

Oil viscosity (0W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows

cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier

starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when

the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a

higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high

speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated before

next oil change.

Preferred

612

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Lubrication system (for Russia and Ukraine)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing

the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,

and check the oil level on the dipstick.

 Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota

recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.

Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil grade: ACEA B1, API CF-4 or CF

(You may also use API CE or CD.)

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill

reference

With filter

Without filter

6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)

6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)

613

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 5W-30 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

If you use SAE 10W-30 or a

higher viscosity engine oil in

extremely low temperatures, the

engine may become difficult to

start, so SAE 5W-30 engine oil is

recommended.

Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows

cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier

starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when

the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a

higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high

speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated before

next oil change.

Preferred

614

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Cooling system

Capacity

With

manual transmission

9.8 L (10.4 qt., 8.6 Imp.qt.)

With

automatic transmission

11.1 L (11.7 qt., 9.8 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene gly-

col-based non-silicate, non-

amine, non-nitrite, and non-

borate coolant with long-life

hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

615

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Electrical system

Automatic transmission

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Battery

Specific gravity reading

at 20C (68F):

1.250  1.290 Fully charged

1.160  1.200 Half charged

1.060  1.100 Discharged

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge

15 A max.

5 A max.

Fluid capacity* 10.6 L (11.2 qt., 9.3 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

 Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause

deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by

vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

616

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Manual transmission

Transfer

Oil capacity

4WD models 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp.qt.)

Pre Runner 2.6 L (2.7 qt., 2.3 Imp.qt.)

Oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

Recommended oil viscosity

For Martinique, Israel, Guadeloupe and

French Guiana

SAE 75W-90, 80W or 80W-90

Others

SAE 75W-90

Oil capacity 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp.qt.)

Oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W-90

617

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Differential

: Made in South Africa*

: Made in Thailand*

: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model

your vehicle is. (P. 41)

Oil capacity

Front

Without

A.D.D

1.45 L (1.53 qt., 1.28 Imp.qt.)

With A.D.D 1.65 L (1.74 qt., 1.45 Imp.qt.)

Rear

With rear

differential

lock system

2.90 L (3.06 qt., 2.55 Imp.qt.)

With LSD 3.35 L (3.54 qt., 2.95 Imp.qt.)

Normal

2.45 L (2.59 qt., 2.16 Imp.qt.)*

3.35 L (3.54 qt., 2.95 Imp.qt.)*

Oil type

Without LSD Hypoid gear oil API GL-5

With LSD Hypoid gear oil LSD API GL-5

Oil viscosity

Without

A.D.D.

Above -18C (0F):

SAE90

Below -18C (0F):

SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90

With A.D.D. SAE75W-90

618

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Clutch

Brakes

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,

110 lbf) while the engine is running

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,

45.0 lbf)

Pedal free play 5  15 mm (0.2  0.6 in.)

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

Pedal

clearance

Left-hand

drive vehicles

Without

VSC

85 mm (3.3 in.)

With VSC 79 mm (3.1 in.)

Right-hand

drive vehicles

Without

VSC

89 mm (3.5 in.)

With VSC 83 mm (3.3 in.)

Pedal free play

1.0  6.0 mm

(0.04  0.24 in.)

Parking brake lever travel*

7 9 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS

No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1704

or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

619

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Chassis lubrication

Steering

Propeller

shafts

Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

or III

620

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Tires and wheels

15 inch tires

16 inch tires

Tire size 255/70R15C 112/110S

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

(unloaded)

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

(loaded)

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Single-cab models 200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29) 250 (2.5, 36)

Extra-cab and

double-cab models

200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29)

250 (2.5, 36)

2, 3

310 (3.1, 45)

2, 4

Wheel size 15  7JJ, 15  7J

Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)

Tire size 205R16C 8PR 110/108S

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

(unloaded)

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

(loaded)

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Single-cab models 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 320 (3.2, 46)

Extra-cab and

double-cab models

240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)

320 (3.2, 46)

2, 3

400 (4.0, 58)

2, 4

Wheel size 16  6J

Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)

621

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

17 inch tires

: Left-hand drive vehicles

: Right-hand drive vehicles

: Half loaded

: Full loaded

Tire size 265/65R17 112S

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

DLX grade models with 1KD-FTV engine

230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm

or bar, 33 psi)

SR grade models with 2KD-FTV engine

Single-cab models

230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm

or bar, 33 psi)

Double-cab models

200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm

or bar, 29 psi)

Other models

200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm

or bar, 29 psi)

Wheel size 17  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)

622

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Light bulbs

A: H4 halogen bulbs

B: H16LL halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

E: Single end bulbs (amber)

F: Single end bulbs (clear)

G: Double end bulbs

*: If equipped

Light Bulbs W Type

Exterior

Headlights 60/55 A

Front fog lights

* 19 B

Front position lights 5 C

Front turn signal lights 21 D

Side turn signal lights 5 C

Rear turn signal lights 21 E

Back-up lights 21 F

Rear fog lights

* 21 F

License plate lights 5 C

Stop/tail lights 21/5 F

Interior

Interior light 8 G

Personal lights 8 C

623

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Fuel information

 If you plan to drive in foreign countries

Low sulfur diesel fuel may not be available, so please check the availability

with your distributor.

 If your engine knocks

 Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

 You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-

ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

EU area:

Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to European stan-

dard EN590.

Except EU area (except Russia):

Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less

of sulfur and has a cetane number of 48 or higher.

Except EU area (Russia):

You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or

higher.

Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel confirming to GOST

R52368-2005 (Sulfur max 50 ppm).

624

6-1. Specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Notice on fuel quality

 Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be

damaged.

 Diesel engine (EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under

names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of

FAME should not be used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehi-

cle’s fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Diesel engine (except EU area [expect Russia]): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl

Ester) fuel sold under names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing

a large amount of FAME should not be used. Your vehicle can use diesel

mixed with 5% max biodiesel FAME (B5). The use of fuel with more than

5% FAME content (B5) will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must

ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source where fuel specifica-

tion and quality can be guaranteed.

In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Diesel engine (except EU area [Russia]): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester)

fuel sold under name such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large

amount of FAME should not be used.

The use of these fuel will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case of any

doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

 Notice on diesel fuel quality

Do not use a fuel that contains more than 50 ppm of sulfur.

Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.

625

Vehicle specifications

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

6-2. Initialization

Items to initialize

*: If equipped

Item When to initialize Reference

Power windows

After reconnecting or chang-

ing the battery

P. 91

Engine oil mainte-

nance data

After changing engine oil P. 491

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation

after such cases as the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is

performed on the vehicle.

626

6-2. Initialization

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Index

627

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Abbreviation list ...................... 628

Alphabetical index................... 629

What to do if... ......................... 639

628

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

4WD 4-Wheel Drive

A/C Air Conditioning

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

ACC Accessory

ADD Automatic Disconnecting Differential

AUX Auxiliary

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

DPF Diesel Particulate Filter

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

GVM Gross Vehicle Mass

LED Light Emitting Diode

LSD Limited Slip Differential

MPAC Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TRC Traction Control

TWI Treadwear indicator

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

629

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Alphabetical index

A/C.....................................252, 258

ABS ...........................................221

Air conditioning filter ..............511

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter..............511

Air conditioning

system ........................252, 258

Airbags

Airbag operating

conditions ...........................112

Airbag precautions for

your child ............................117

Airbag warning light ..............559

General airbag

precautions.........................117

Locations of airbags..............109

Modification and disposal of

airbags................................121

Proper driving

posture........................107, 117

Side and curtain

shield airbags operating

conditions ...........................112

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions ............117

SRS airbags..........................109

Antenna ....................................274

Anti-lock brake system ..........221

Ashtray ..................................... 452

Audio input............................... 313

Audio system

Antenna ................................274

Audio input............................ 313

AUX port ............................... 313

CD player.............................. 275

iPod....................................... 290

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 282

Optimal use........................... 309

Portable music player ...........313

Radio .................................... 270

Steering wheel

audio switch........................ 314

Type...................................... 268

USB memory ........................ 300

Automatic air conditioning

system

Air conditioning filter ............. 511

Automatic

air conditioning system....... 258

Automatic disconnecting

differential.............................. 214

Automatic light control

system.................................... 193

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission......... 166

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 585

AUX port ........................... 313, 369

Auxiliary box ............................ 447

630

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Back window .............................. 95

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs.............542

Wattage.................................622

Battery

Checking...............................496

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................587

Preparing and checking

before winter.......................235

Bluetooth

audio ..................... 370

Bluetooth

phone ....................395

Bottle holders........................... 446

Brake

Parking brake........................174

Brake assist..............................221

Break-in tips .............................146

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control.................................178

Care

Exterior ................................. 468

Interior................................... 472

Seat belts.............................. 473

CD player.......................... 275, 336

Chains....................................... 235

Child restraint system

Baby seats, definition............ 122

Baby seats, installation ......... 134

Child seats, definition............ 122

Child seats, installation ......... 134

Installing CRS with seat

belts............................ 135, 136

Junior seats, definition..........122

Junior seats, installation ....... 134

Child safety

Airbag precautions................ 117

Battery precautions....... 496, 590

Child restraint system ........... 122

Child-protectors ...................... 61

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 82

Installing child restraints ....... 134

Power window lock switch ...... 92

Power window precautions..... 93

Removed key battery

precautions......................... 515

Seat belt precautions.............. 83

Seat heater

precautions......................... 456

631

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Child-protectors......................... 61

Cigarette lighter .......................453

Cleaning

Exterior..................................468

Interior...................................472

Seat belts ..............................473

Clock ......................................... 451

Compass................................... 459

Condenser ................................ 495

Console box .............................443

Cooling system

Engine overheating ...............592

Cruise control ..........................202

Cup holder................................ 444

Curtain shield airbags .............109

Daytime running light.............. 193

Deck hooks...............................465

Defogger

Rear window .........................266

Side mirrors...........................266

Diesel particulate filter

system .................................... 227

Dimension ................................602

Display

Multi-information

display ................................185

Touch screen ........................317

Trip information.....................187

Display audio

Antenna ................ 335, 381, 391

Audio input............352, 362, 369

AUX port ............................... 369

Bluetooth

audio................... 370

Bluetooth

phone ................. 395

CD player.............................. 336

iPod....................................... 350

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 337

Radio .................................... 331

Steering wheel audio

switch ................................. 314

USB memory ........................ 360

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 480

Doors

Door glasses........................... 91

Door lock........................... 48, 59

Side doors............................... 59

Side mirrors ............................ 88

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light......................................... 561

Driving

Correct posture ..................... 107

Procedures ........................... 146

632

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Emergency flashers

Switch ...................................548

Emergency, in case of

If the engine will not start ......584

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P .....................585

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................587

If the warning buzzer

sounds................................557

If the warning light

turns on...............................557

If you have a flat tire .............565

If you lose your keys .............586

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls..................595

If you think something is

wrong..................................555

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................596

If your vehicle

has to be stopped

in an emergency.................598

If your vehicle needs to be

towed..................................549

If your vehicle overheats.......592

Engine

Compartment........................ 486

Engine switch........................ 162

Hood ..................................... 484

How to start the

engine................................. 162

Identification number ............607

If the engine will not start...... 584

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls .................595

If your vehicle

has to be stopped

in an emergency................. 598

Ignition switch ....................... 162

Overheating .......................... 592

Engine coolant

Capacity................................ 614

Checking............................... 493

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 235

Engine coolant temperature

gauge...................................... 176

Engine immobilizer system .... 102

Engine oil

Capacity........................ 610, 612

Checking............................... 488

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 235

Engine switch .......................... 162

Engine switch light.................. 438

633

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Floor mat ..................................457

Fluid

Washer..................................500

Four-wheel drive system

Front drive control lever ........212

Front fog lights

Replacing light bulbs.............535

Switch ...................................195

Wattage.................................622

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light ........................561

Front position lights

Replacing light bulbs.............537

Switch ...................................191

Wattage.................................622

Front seats

Adjustment ..............................67

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.............539

Switch ...................................173

Wattage.................................622

Fuel

Capacity................................609

Fuel gauge............................176

Fuel pump shut off system....556

Gas station information.........644

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls..................595

Information ............................623

Refueling.................................96

Fuel door .................................... 96

Fuel filler door............................ 96

Fuel filter .................................. 502

Fuel pump shut off system..... 556

Fuses ........................................ 516

Gas station information .......... 644

Gauges ..................................... 176

Glove box ................................. 442

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)................ 387

Head restraints

Adjustment.............................. 75

Headlight cleaner..................... 201

Headlights

Replacing light bulbs............. 533

Switch ................................... 191

Wattage ................................ 622

Heaters

Seat heaters ......................... 455

Side mirror ............................ 266

Hood ......................................... 484

Hooks

Deck...................................... 465

Horn .......................................... 175

634

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Identification

Engine...................................607

Vehicle ..................................606

Ignition switch.......................... 162

Ignition switch light .................438

Illuminated entry system.........439

Indicator lights ......................... 180

Initialization

Items to initialize ...................625

Inside rear view mirror .............. 86

Intercooler ................................495

Interior lights

Interior lights .........................438

Switch ...................................439

Wattage.................................622

Jack

Vehicle-equipped jack...........565

Jack handle ..............................565

Keyless entry ............................. 48

Keys

Engine switch........................162

If you lose your keys .............586

Key number.............................46

Keyless entry ..........................48

Keys........................................46

Wireless remote control key....48

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 543

Wattage ................................ 622

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................. 532

Wattage ................................ 622

Lights

Engine switch light................ 438

Fog light switch ..................... 195

Headlights switch.................. 191

Interior light list...................... 438

Interior light switch ................ 439

Personal light switch............. 439

Replacing light bulbs............. 532

Turn signal lever ................... 173

Wattage ................................ 622

Limited slip differential ........... 221

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself

maintenance.......................480

Maintenance data ................. 602

Maintenance requirements ... 476

Manual headlight leveling

dial .......................................... 192

Manual transmission............... 170

Meter

Instrument panel light

control................................. 178

Meters................................... 176

635

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Microphone .............................. 388

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror ............86

Side mirror heater .................266

Side mirrors.............................88

Vanity mirrors........................450

MP3 disc ........................... 282, 337

Multi-information

display .................................... 185

Odometer.................................. 176

Oil

Engine oil ..............................488

Opener

Fuel filler door .........................96

Hood .....................................484

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding...............88

Outside temperature

display .................................... 187

Overhead console....................447

Overheating, Engine................592

Parking brake ...........................174

Personal lights

Personal lights ......................438

Switch ...................................439

Wattage.................................622

Power heater ............................ 265

Power outlet ............................. 454

Power windows.......................... 91

Quarter windows ....................... 94

Radiator .................................... 495

Radio................................. 270, 331

Rear differential lock

system.................................... 217

Rear fog lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 542

Switch ................................... 196

Wattage ................................ 622

Rear seat

Removing the rear seat

cushions ............................... 72

Tumbling the bottom

cushion................................. 73

Rear step bumper ...................... 65

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 542

Wattage ................................ 622

Rear view monitor system...... 207

Rear window defogger ............ 266

Replacing

Fuses.................................... 516

Key battery............................ 513

Light bulbs ............................ 532

Tires...................................... 565

Wireless remote control

battery ................................ 513

636

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt.............80

Child restraint system

installation...........................134

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ......................473

Emergency Locking

Retractor...............................81

How to wear your seat belt .....78

How your child should wear

the seat belt..........................82

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use.................................82

Reminder light.......................561

Seat belt pretensioners...........81

Seat heaters ............................. 455

Seats

Adjustment ..............................67

Adjustment

precautions...........................71

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............134

Cleaning................................472

Head restraint .........................75

Properly sitting in the seat.....107

Seat heaters..........................455

Service reminder

indicators ..............................180

Shift lever

Automatic transmission......... 166

Front drive control lever........ 212

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................ 585

Manual transmission............. 170

Shift lock system ..................... 585

Side airbags ............................. 109

Side doors .................................. 59

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding .............. 88

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 541

Wattage ................................ 622

Spare tire

Inflation pressure .................. 507

Storage location....................565

Specifications .......................... 602

Speedometer............................ 176

Steering

Column lock release ............. 164

Fluid...................................... 619

Steering wheel

Adjustment.............................. 85

Audio switches..............314, 384

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 542

Wattage ................................ 622

Storage feature ........................ 440

Storage precautions................ 233

637

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................596

Sun visors ................................ 449

Switch

Engine switch........................162

Fog light switch .....................195

Ignition switch .......................162

Light switches .......................191

Power door lock switch ...........60

Power window switch..............91

Window lock switch.................92

Wipers and washer

switch..................................199

Tachometer .............................. 176

Tail lights

Replacing light bulbs.............542

Switch ...................................191

Wattage.................................622

Tailgate ....................................... 63

Telephone switch..................... 387

Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system ................................102

Tire inflation pressure ............. 507

Tires

Chains................................... 235

Checking............................... 503

If you have a flat tire ............. 565

Inflation pressure .................. 507

Replacing.............................. 565

Rotating tires......................... 503

Size....................................... 620

Snow tires ............................. 235

Spare tire .............................. 565

Tools ......................................... 565

Towing

Emergency towing ................ 549

Trailer towing ........................ 239

Traction control ....................... 221

Trailer towing ........................... 239

TRC ........................................... 221

Trip information

display.................................... 185

Trip meter ................................. 176

Turn signal lights

Replacing

light bulbs ...........539, 541, 542

Switch ................................... 173

Wattage ................................ 622

638

Alphabetical index

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Valet key .....................................46

Vanity mirrors .......................... 450

Vehicle data recordings ............ 38

Vehicle identification

number ................................... 606

Vehicle stability control ..........221

VSC ...........................................221

Warning buzzers

Key reminder.........................563

Seat belt reminder.................561

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system..........559

Automatic transmission fluid

temperature ........................559

Brake system ........................557

Charging system ...................558

Diesel particulate filter...........560

Electronic engine control

system ................................558

Engine oil change

reminder .............................562

Fuel filter ...............................560

Low engine oil level...............562

Low engine oil pressure........558

Low fuel level ........................561

Malfunction indicator lamp ....558

Open door.............................561

Seat belt reminder light.........561

SRS airbags..........................559

Timing belt replacement........559

Washer

Checking............................... 500

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 235

Switch ................................... 199

Washing and waxing ............... 468

Weight....................................... 603

Wheels ...................................... 509

Window glasses ........................ 91

Window lock switch .................. 92

Windows

Power windows....................... 91

Rear window defogger..........266

Washer ................................. 199

Windshield wipers ................... 199

Wireless remote control key

Locking/Unlocking................... 48

Replacing the battery............ 513

Wireless remote control key ... 48

WMA disc ......................... 282, 337

639

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 56 5

If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 584

If the engine will not start

P. 595

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls

P. 102

Engine immobilizer system

P. 587

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be

moved out

P. 585

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

from P

The engine coolant temperature

gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming

from under the hood

P. 592

If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

P. 586

If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 587

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 5 9

Side doors

The vehicle is stuck in

mud or sand

P. 596

If the vehicle becomes stuck

640

What to do if...

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

The warning light or indicator

light comes on

P. 557

If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds

 Instrument cluster

Non-optitron type meters

Optitron type meters

641

What to do if...

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

 Center panel

Vehicles without multi-information display

Vehicles with multi-information display

642

What to do if...

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

Warning lights

P. 55 7 P. 559

P. 55 8 P. 560

P. 55 8 P. 561

P. 55 9 P. 561

P. 55 9 P. 562

P. 559

Brake system warning

light

Timing belt replacement

warning light

Charging system

warning light

Fuel system warning

light

Low engine oil pressure

warning light

DPF system warning

light

Malfunction indicator

lamp

Open door warning light

SRS warning light

Low fuel level warning

light

ABS warning light

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

VSC OFF indicator light

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

Slip indicator light

Unengaged “Park”

warning light

Cruise control indicator

light

Low engine oil level

warning light

Engine oil change

reminder light

Four-wheel drive

indicator light

Automatic transmission

fluid temperature warning

light

643

What to do if...

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

644

HILUX_OM_OM0K134E_(EE)

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Fuel filler door

P. 9 6

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 484

Tire inflation pressure

P. 620

Fuel filler door opener

P. 9 6

Hood lock release lever

P. 484

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type P. 99, 609

Cold tire inflation pressure P. 620

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill

reference)

L (qt., Imp.qt.)

With filter 6.9 (7.3, 6.1)

Without filter 6.6 (7.0, 5.8)

Engine oil type P. 610, 612

Toyota Hilux 2012 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Toyota Hilux 2012

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info